DCP301
Digital Program Controller
User’s Manual
EN1I-6197
Issue 7 (02/04)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARRANTY
The Honeywell device described herein has been manufactured and
tested for corrent operation and is warranted for a period of one year.
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
If you encounter a problem with your unit, please review all the
configuration data to verify that your selections are consistent with
your application; (i.e. Inputs, Outputs, Alarms, Limits, etc.). If the
problem persists after checking the above parameters, you can get
technical assistance by calling the following:
In the U.S.A. ・・・・・1-800-423-9883
In Europe ・・・・・・・Your local branch office
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
■ About Icons
Safety precautions are for ensuring safe and correct use of this product, and for
preventing injury to the operator and other people or damage to property. You must
observe these safety precautions. The safety precautions described in this manual
are indicated by various icons.
The following describes the icons and their meanings. Be sure to read and
understand the following descriptions before reading this manual.
Warnings are indicated when mishandling this product might
WARNING
CAUTION
result in death or serious injury to the user.
Cautions are indicated when mishandling this product might
result in minor injury to the user, or only physical damage to
this product.
■ Examples
Triangles warn the user of a possible danger that may be caused by
wrongful operation or misuse of this product.
These icons graphically represent the actual danger. (The example on
the left warns the user of the danger of electric shock.)
White circles with a diagonal bar notify the user that specific actions are
prohibited to prevent possible danger.
These icons graphically represent the actual prohibited action. (The
example on the left notifies the user that disassembly is prohibited.)
Black filled-in circles instruct the user to carry out a specific obligatory
action to prevent possible danger.
These icons graphically represent the actual action to be carried out.
(The example on the left instructs the user to remove the plug from the
outlet.)
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING
Before connecting the DCP301 to the measurement target or external con-
trol circuits, make sure that the FG terminal is properly grounded (100Ω
max.).
Failure to do so might cause electric shock or fire.
Before wiring, or removing/mounting the DCP301, be sure to turn the power
OFF. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.
Do not touch electrically charged parts such as the power terminals. Doing
so might cause electric shock.
Do not disassemble the DCP301. Doing so might cause electric shock or
faulty operation.
CAUTION
Use the DCP301 within the operating ranges recommended in the specifica-
tions (temperature, humidity, voltage, vibration, shock, mounting direction,
atmosphere, etc.). Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation.
Do not block ventilation holes. Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.
Wire the DCP301 properly according to predetermined standards. Also wire
the DCP301 using designed power leads according to recognized installa-
tion methods.
Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.
Do not allow lead clippings, chips or water to enter the controller case.
Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.
Inputs to the current input terminals (31) and (33) on the DCP301 should be
within the current and voltage ranges listed in the specifications.
Firmly tighten the terminal screws at the torque listed in the specifications.
Insufficient tightening of terminal screws might cause electric shock or fire.
Do not use unused terminals on the DCP301 as relay terminals.
Doing so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.
We recommend attaching the terminal cover (sold separately) after wiring
the DCP301. Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty opera-
tion.
Use the relays on the DCP301 within the service life listed in the specifica-
tions.
Continued use of the relays after the recommended service life might cause
fire or faulty operation.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION
Use induced lighting surge preventive device if there is the risk of power
surges caused by lightning.
Failure to do might cause fire or faulty operation.
Before replacing the battery, be sure to turn the power OFF. Failure to do so
might cause electric shock.
Do not touch internal components immediately after turning the power OFF
to replace the battery. Doing so might cause burns.
・ Do not insert the battery with the polarities (+,-) reversed.
・ Do not use damaged (broken battery skin, leaking battery fluid) batteries.
・ Do not throw batteries into fires, or charge, short-circuit, disassemble or
heat batteries.
・ Store batteries in low-temperature, dry locations.
Failure to observe the above cautions may cause batteries to emit heat or
split, or battery fluid to lead.
Store batteries out of the reach of small children.
Batteries are small and are easy to swallow. If a child swallows a battery,
consult a physician immediately.
Return used batteries to Honeywell sales/service office or your dealer. When
disposing of used batteries at the user site, observe local by laws.
Handling Precautions
After turning the power ON, do not operate the DCP301 for at least 15s
to allow the DCP301 to stabilize.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unpacking
Check the following when removing the DCP301 from its package.
1. Check the model No. to make sure that you have received the product that you ordered.
2. Check the DCP301 for any apparent physical damage.
3. Check the contents of the package against the Package List to make sure that all accessories are included
in the package.
After unpacking, handle the DCP301 and its accessories taking care to prevent damage or loss of parts.
If an inconsistency is found or the package contents are not in order, immediately contact your dealer.
Product List
Name
Model No.
Q’ty
Remarks
Body
1
See 1-5 How Model Nos.
Are Configured, page 1-5.
Mounting bracket
User's Manual
81405411-001
EN1I-6197
The Model No. is the parts
No. for two installation tools.
1 set (2)
1
This manual
XX
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XX
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
XX
X
U
al
u
X
X
an
s
M
ser
1
Unit indicator label
(SI units)
N-3132
Request
The filter on the front of the controller is Covered with a protective film to protect the surface of the controller.
When you have finished mounting and wiring the controller, fix cellophane adhesive tape on the corners of the
filter, and pull in the direction of the arrow to peel off the protective film.
Pull towards you.
Handling Precautions
Peeling off the protective film with your fingernail might scratch the
surface of the controller.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Organization of This User’s Manual
This manual is organized as follows.
Chapter 1. GENERAL
This chapter describes DCP301 applications, features and basic function blocks. It
also gives a list of model numbers.
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
This chapter describes the names and functions of DCP301 parts, input types and
range Nos.
Chapter 3. MOUNTING
Chapter 4. WIRING
This chapter describes how to mount the DCP301 on control panels. This chapter
is required reading for designers of control systems using the DCP301.
This chapter describes the precautions when wiring the DCP301 to a control
system and how to wire the DCP301. This chapter is required reading for
designers of control systems and supervisors of wiring work.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
Chapter 6. OPERATION
This chapter describes the functions of the controller. This chapter is required
reading for designers of control systems using the DCP301.
This chapter describes how to switch the basic display states of the DCP301, and
select and run programs. This chapter is required reading for designers of control
systems using the DCP301 and users of the DCP301.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
This chapter describes how to set up parameters on the controller and the meaning
of settings.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
This chapter describes how to set up programs on the controller and the meanings
of settings.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes points to check when the DCP301 is not working properly
or how to remedy trouble that might occur.
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS
This chapter describes the general specifications, performance specifications and
external dimensions of the DCP301.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
This chapter describes calibration procedures for the functions of the DCP301.
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Safety Precautions
Unpacking
Request
Organization of the Product Manual
Conventions Used in This Manual
Chapter 1. GENERAL
1-1 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 Basic Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3 Data Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1-4 System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
■ System configuration by CPL communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-5 Model Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
■ Model selection guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
2-1 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
■ Basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
■ Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
■ Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
■ Functions using two or more keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
■ Loader jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-3 Input Type and Range No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
■ Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Chapter 3. MOUNTING
3-1 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2 Panel Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-3 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
■ Mounting locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
■ Noise generating sources and countermeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
■ Dust-proof cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
■ Mounting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-1 Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 Compensating Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-3 Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-4 Layout of Terminals and Recommended Lead Draw-out Direction. . . . . . . 4-5
4-5 Connecting the Ground and Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
■ Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
■ Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-6 Wiring of Standard and Add-on Terminal Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
■ Standard terminal layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
■ Add-on terminal layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-7 Connecting Inputs (analog inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
■ Connecting input 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-8 Connecting control outputs (outputs 1, 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
■ Relay output (0D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
■ Current output (5G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
■ Position-proportional output (2G). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
■ Voltage output (6D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
■ Heat/cool output (3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
■ Heat/cool output (5K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-9 Connecting auxiliary outputs (outputs 2, 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
■ 0D, 5G, 6D auxiliary outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
■ 2G, 3D, 5K auxiliary outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-10 Connecting Event Output (relay output). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-11 Connecting Time Event Output (open-collector). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-12 Connecting External Switch (RSW) Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-13 Connecting for Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
■ RS-485 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-14 Isolating Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
■ Control outputs 0D, 5G, 6D, 3D, 5K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
■ Control output 2G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5-1 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
■ Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5-2 Program Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
■ Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
■ Events 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
■ Time events 1 to 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
■ PID set selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
■ G.Soak (guarantee soak) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
■ PV start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
■ Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
■ Pattern link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-3 Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
■ Mode type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
■ Mode transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
■ Mode transition operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
■ Mode transition limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5-4 Controller and Programmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-5 Input Processing Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-6 Output Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
■ Control output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
■ SP output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
■ Auxiliary output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6-1 Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2 Switching the Basic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2 Copying Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
■ Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8-3 General Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
■ Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
9-1 Self-diagnostics and Alarm Code Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
■ Self-diagnostics at power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
■ Self-diagnostics at each sampling cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
■ Intermittent self-diagnostics during operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
■ Self-diagnostics only when certain functions are operating . . . . . . . . . 9-2
■ Alarm code display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
■ Alarm categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9-2 Trouble during Key Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
PROG
■ The program No. does not change by pressing
in basic display
state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
■ The program No. does not change by pressing in the basic
display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
RUN/HOLD
■ The controller does not change to RUN mode by pressing
in
the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
RUN/HOLD
■ The controller does not change to HOLD mode by pressing
in
the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
PROG
RUN/HOLD
■ The controller cannot be reset by pressing
+
in the basic
display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
PROG
DISP
■ The program is not advanced by pressing
+
in the basic
display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
FUNC
■ The controller does not change to FAST mode by pressing
+
in the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
A/M
■ The controller does not change to MANUAL mode by pressing
in the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
A/M
■ The controller does not change to AUTO mode by pressing
in
the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
AT
■ Auto-tuning (AT) is not started by pressing
in the basic display
state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
AT
■ Auto-tuning (AT) is not canceled by pressing
in the basic display
state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
PARA
■ Setting group other than “p a R a” is not displayed by pressing
by selecting the setting group in parameter set state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
PARA
■ Setting group other than “S e t” is not displayed by pressing
by
selecting the setting group in parameter set state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
ENT
■ The controller does not enter the setting entry state by pressing
in the parameter setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
■ The controller does not change to setup group selection state and
PARA
setting entry state continues by pressing
in parameter setting
entry state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
■ The controller does not change to program setup state by pressing
FUNC
PROG
+
in the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
■ The controller does not change to the setting entry state by pressing
ENT
in the basic display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
■ Items cannot be changed by pressing
state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
■ Event items cannot be changed by repeatedly pressing in
program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
■ Time events cannot be changed by repeatedly pressing in
program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
■ PID set items cannot be changed by repeatedly pressing in
program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
■ G.Soak items cannot be changed by repeatedly pressing in
,
in program setup
,
,
,
,
program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
■ PV start items, cycle items and pattern link items cannot be displayed
by repeatedly pressing
,
in program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
■ Insertion/deletion of segments cannot be confirmed by pressing
FUNC
ENT
+
in program setup state. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
CLR
FUNC
■ Program deletion cannot be confirmed by pressing
+
while
entering pattern items in program setup state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
PROG
■ The program cannot be copied by pressing
+
in the basic
display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
CLR
FUNC
DISP
■ General reset is not applied by pressing
+
+
in the basic
display state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9-3 Motor Adjustment is Impossible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
■ Normal wiring for direct motor rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
■ Normal wiring for reverse motor rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
■ Alarm display caused by wrong wiring and causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9-4 Replacing the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
■ BAT LED blinking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
■ Items to prepare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
■ Replacement procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS
10-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
■ Accessories/option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-2 External Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
■ Soft dust-proof cover set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
■ Hard dust-proof cover set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
■ Terminal cover set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
■ Precautions before calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
■ Equipment needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11-1 Quick Reference Table for Calibration Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11-2 Calibration Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
■ Enter calibration mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
■ Function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
■ PV calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
■ Cold junction sensor calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
■ Current output calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Index
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conventions Used in This Manual
The following conventions are used in this manual.
Handling Precautions
: Handling Precautions indicate items that the user should pay attention
to when handling the DCP301.
Note
: Notes indicate useful information that the user might benefit by
knowing.
DISP
: These icons represent keys on the DCP301’s console.
PROG
RUN/HOLD
RUN/HOLD
+
: Combinations of icons like these indicate that
must be pressed
PROG
while holding
down.
(1) (2) (3)
>>
: The numbers with the parenthesis indicate steps in a sequence or
indicate corresponding parts in an explanation.
: Indicates the controller state after an operation.
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1. GENERAL
1-1 Features
The DCP301 is a general-purpose single-loop program controller for controlling temperature, pressure, flow rate and
other inputs.
G High accuracy achieved by multi-range input
Multi-range input allows you to choose between the following input types: thermocouple,
resistance temperature detector (RTD), dc voltage and dc current. Accuracy of ±0.1%FS±1
digit and a sampling cycle of 0.1s ensures consistently high-precision control.
G Wide range of control output types
A wide range of models supporting various control output types are available: relay time-
proportional output, position-proportional output, current output, voltage time-propor-
tional output, and heat/cool output.
On models other than heat-cool control output, you can also choose neural net-based
auto-tuning and smart-tuning for inhibiting overshoot, in addition 2 degrees of freedom
PID.
G Enhanced compatibility with PLC
12 external switch inputs (eight optional), three event outputs and five time event outputs
(optional) ensure compatibility with automating systems designed around a PLC core.
G Easy operation
PARA
Up to eight frequently changed parameter setups can be registered to the
tating recall of item setups.
key, facili-
If the Smart Loader Package (sold separately) is used together with the DCP301, pro-
grams and parameters can be set up on a personal computer.
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1. GENERAL
1-2 Basic Function Blocks
Input
Outputs
Control Operation Block
• Square root
extraction
• Output change
limitter
• Upper/lower
limitter
• Thermocouple
• Resistance
temperature detector
• dc current
• Current
• Relay
• Voltage
• Position-proportional
• Heat-cool
• Mode transition
•
Lineariza-
tion table
approxima-
tion
• PID control
• Auto-tuning
• Neuro & Fuzzy
• Forward/reverse action
• ON-OFF control
• SP output
• dc voltage
• Bias
• Filter
4 external switch inputs
Event Outputs
• RUN
• PV
• SP
• Deviation
• MV
• SP limit
• SP bias
• HOLD
• RESET
• ADV
• MFB
• Modes
• Alarm
*
8 external switch inputs
• Program No.
• FAST
• PV start
• AUTO/MANUAL
• AT
• G.Soak cancel
• Direct/reverse action
*
*
Time Event Outputs
• Time event
• Segment code
Key operation
Auxiliary Outputs
• Display selection
• Program No.
• RUN/HOLD
• RESET
• ADV
• FAST
• PV
• SP
• Deviation
• MV
• MFB
• AUTO/MANUAL
• AT
• Program setup
• Parameter setup
*
CPL communications I/O
MFB input
Loader communications I/O
Parameters
Program
• Variable parameters
• Event configuration
• PID parameters (8 sets)
• Setup
• 19 patterns x 30 segments
• Events
• Time events
• PID sets
• Tables
• G.Soak
• Constant-value operation
• PV start
• Cycle
* indicates options.
• Pattern link
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1. GENERAL
1-3 Data Structure
Data is made up of “parameters” that are used mainly for setting controller functions and “programs” that are used for
setting operation during program operation of the controller.
• Total of 19 program patterns
Program No.=19 Number of segments=8
(3)
SP
(4)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Program No.=3 Number of segments=15
SP
(8)
(12)
Program No.=2 Number of segments=19
Time
(13)
(14)
(15)
Program No.=1 Number of segments=6
SP
(5)
(4)
(18)
(19)
Time
(3)
(6)
(2)
(1)
Time
Time
• Parameters
Variable parameters
Event configuration data
PID parameters
Setup data
Table data
Constant-value operation data
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1. GENERAL
1-4 System Configuration
G System configuration by CPL communications
On DCP301 models supporting RS-485 communications (optional), controllers can be
connected as slave stations on a communications network.
Personal computer (master station)
RS-232C
RS-232C/RS-485 converter
RS-485
DCP301 (slave station)
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1. GENERAL
1-5 Model Numbers
G Model selection guide
Basic
Model Output Function Power Option Option Additions
Description
No.
1
2
P301
Digital Program Controller (single-
loop model)
0D
Relay outputs (on-off, or time-
proportional)
2G
5G
Position-proportional output
Current output
(controller/programmer selectable)
(changeable to 6D output)
6D
Voltage output (current value
adjustment function supported, on-
off, or time-proportional)
(changeable to 5D output)
3D
5K
Heat-cool output, relay output +
relay output (PID control or 3-
position-proportional)
Heat-cool output, current output +
current output (changeable be-
tween current output and voltage
output)
0
One input channel
ES
Free power supply (90 to 264Vac)
No auxiliary output
00
01
02
1 auxiliary output
2 auxiliary outputs
0
1
2
External switch inputs (4), time
events not supported, communica-
tions not supported
External switch inputs (12), 5 time
events supported, communications
not supported
External switch inputs (12), 5 time
events supported, RS-485 commu-
nications supported
00
T0
K0
D0
B0
Additional treatment not supported
Tropical treatment
Antisulfide treatment
Inspection Certificate supplied
Additional treatment + Inspection
Certificate provided
L0
Y0
Antisulfide treatment + Inspection
Certificate provided
Traceability Certificate
Handling Precautions
On 2G, 3D and 5K output models, 2 auxiliary output (option 1) cannot be desig-
nated.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
2-1 Structure
This controller comprises a body, console, case, standard terminal base and add-on terminal base.
Console
Contains 7-segment display, LEDs,
operation keys and loader connector.
Case
Body
Contains console and electrical circuits.
Standard terminal base
Connectors for connecting power, input, output, event outputs,
external switch inputs (4) and auxiliary outputs (options)
Add-on terminal base
Terminal for connecting external switch inputs (8 options), time event outputs (options) and
CPL communications (options).
The add-on terminal base is provided only on models that support optional external switch
inputs (8) and time event outputs.
Lock screw
Fixes the case to the body.
Key cover
Cover for preventing erroneous operation.
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
2-2 Console
The console comprises keys for operating the controller, displays and LEDs.
■ Basic display state
The “basic display state” is the state in which the controller operating state is displayed
on the console.
When the power is turned ON, the controller is in this state.
Key operation changes the controller from the basic display state to one of the parameter
setup, program setup, program copy or general reset states. Key operation also returns
the controller to the basic display state.
Power ON
Parameter setups
Program setups
Basic display states
Program copy
General reset
■ Display
Segment No. display
Program No. display
Basic indicator LED lamps
Upper display
Lower display
Mode indicator LED lamps
Low battery voltage LED (BAT)
Control/output state LED
Event LEDs
Profile display
• Program No. display
In the basic display state, this display indicates the currently selected program No.
In the program setup state, this display indicates the program No. currently being set up.
During constant-value operation, this display goes out in the basic display state.
When an alarm occurs in the basic display state, alarm code “A L” is displayed.
• Segment No. display
In the basic display state, this display indicates the currently selected segment No.
In the program setup state, this display indicates the segment No. currently being set up.
During constant-value operation, this display goes out in the basic display state.
In the parameter setup state, this display indicates the item No.
When an alarm occurs in the basic display state, the alarm code No. is displayed.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
• Mode indicator LEDs
RUN, HLD: Display the READY, RUN, HOLD, FAST and END modes. (See follow-
ing table.)
Mode
READY
RUN
HOLD
FAST
END
LED
RUN
Out
Out
Lit
Out
Lit
Blinking
Out
Out
HLD
Out
Blinking
MAN
PRG
: Lights in the MANUAL mode, and goes out in the AUTO mode.
: Lights in the program setup state. Otherwise, this LED is out.
• Upper display
In the basic display state, displays PV and other values.
In the parameter setup state, displays the item code.
• Lower display
In the basic display state, displays SP, time, output and other values.
In the parameter setup state, displays the item setting value.
• Low battery voltage LED
BAT: Blinks when the battery voltage is low. Otherwise, this LED is out.
• Control/output state LED
AT: Blinks during auto-tuning, and lights during smart-tuning. Otherwise, this LED is
out.
OT1: When relay or voltage are assigned to output 1, lights when output is ON and goes
out when output is OFF. In the case of 2G output models, lights when the open-
side relay is ON and goes out when the relay is OFF.
Lights when current output is assigned to output 1.
OT2: When relay or voltage are assigned to output 2, lights when output is ON and goes
out when output is OFF. In the case of 2G output models, lights when the closed-
side relay is ON and goes out when the relay is OFF. Lights when current output
is assigned to output 2, and goes out when auxiliary output is assigned to output 2.
OT3: Out
• Basic indicator LEDs
PV: Lights during PV display. Otherwise, this LED is out.
SP: Lights during SP display. Otherwise, this LED is out.
OUT: Lights during output display. Otherwise, this LED is out.
TM: Lights during time display. Otherwise, this LED is out.
CYC: Lights during cycle display. Otherwise, this LED is out.
CH1: Out
CH2: Out
• Event LEDs
EV1, EV2, : • In the basic display state or parameter setup state, light when each of
EV3
events1 to 3 are ON, and go out when OFF.
• In the program setup (programming) state, light when each of the items
for events 1 to 3 are displayed. Otherwise, these LEDs are out.
T1, T2, T3, : • Light when each of time events 1 to 5 are ON, and go out when OFF.
T4, T5
• In the program setup (programming) state, light when each of the items
for time events 1 to 5 are displayed.
Otherwise, these LEDs are out.
• Profile display
Displays the tendencies (rise, soak, fall) of the program pattern.
Blinks during G.soak standby, and lights successively after the power is turned ON.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
■ Keys
DISP
PROG : Program key
: Display key
FUNC : Function key
Loader jack
: Left arrow key, right arrow key
: Up arrow key, down arrow key
A/M
: Auto/Manual key
AT
RUN/HOLD : Run/Hold key
: Clear key
: Auto-tuning key
CLR
PARA : Parameter key
ENT
: Enter key
Category
Function
To change the display
Key operation
DISP
Basic display state
PROG
To change the program No. in ascending order
(in READY mode)
To execute running of program
(in READY mode)
RUN/HOLD
To run the program
(in READY, HOLD, FAST modes)
To hold the program
(in RUN mode)
PROG
RUN/HOLD
DISP
To reset the program
(in READY, HOLD, FAST, END modes)
+
PROG
FUNC
A/M
To advance the program
(in RUN, HOLD, FAST modes)
+
+
To run the program fast
(in RUN, HOLD modes)
To execute manual operation
(in AUTO mode)
To execute automatic operation
(in MANUAL mode)
AT
To start auto-tuning
(when not executing auto-tuning)
To cancel auto-tuning
(when executing auto-tuning)
To change values during manual operation
(when MV or SP is blinking)
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
Category
Function
Key operation
FUNC
PARA
Starts parameter setup. So the controller enters se-
lection of setup group (major item).
(in basic display state)
Parameter setup
+
PARA
ENT
To change the setup group (major item)
To fix the setup group
To moves between individual items (minor items)
ENT
To start changing individual item setting values
(while setting value is blinking)
To end changing individual item setting values
(while setting value is blinking)
To change individual item setting values
(while setting value is blinking)
PARA
To cancel changing individual item setting values
(in basic display state)
To selects setup group
To end parameter setup
DISP
PARA
PARA
key
To start changing assignment item setting values
(in basic display state)
Assignment item
setup
To move to next item by assignment item, and start
changing setting values
To change assignment item setting values
(while setting value is blinking)
ENT
To end changing assignment item setting values
(while setting value is blinking)
To start changing assignment item setting values
To end assignment item setup
DISP
FUNC
PROG
Program setup
To start program setup (programming)
(in basic display state)
+
To move between program items and segment Nos.
ENT
To start changing item setting values
(while setting value is blinking)
To end changing item setting values
(while setting value is blinking)
To change item setting values
(while setting value is blinking)
FUNC
DISP
CLR
To clear item setting
(while setting value is blinking)
+
To cancel changing item setting values
(while setting value is blinking)
FUNC
FUNC
FUNC
ENT
To insert/delete segments
+
+
+
PROG
To change the program No. in ascending order
To change the program No. in descending order
To end program setup (programming)
DISP
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
Category
Function
To start program copy
Key operation
PROG
Program copy
+
(in basic display state)
To change the copy destination program No.
ENT
To execute program copy
(while setting value is blinking)
DISP
To end program copy
CLR
FUNC
DISP
General reset
To check general reset
(in basic display state)
+
+
ENT
To execute general reset
To cancel general reset
DISP
Handling Precautions
Do not operate the console keys using a sharp-pointed object such as a propel-
ling pencil or needle. Doing so might damage the console.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
■ Functions using two or more keys
PROG
RUN/HOLD
+
: Reset keys
Press
RUN/HOLD
PROG
with
held down in the basic display state to reset the controller.
The controller enters the READY mode in the RUN, HOLD, FAST or END modes.
The controller cannot be reset in the READY mode by key operation.
PROG
DISP
+
: Advance keys
DISP
PROG
Press
with
held down in the program operation mode in the basic display state to
advance the program.
In the RUN, HOLD or FAST modes, the program advances to the next segment.
The controller cannot advance in the READY mode by key operation.
FUNC
+
: Fast keys
FUNC
Press
with
held down in the program operation mode in the basic display state to
fast-operate the program.
The controller enters the FAST mode from the RUN or HOLD modes.
FUNC
FUNC
PARA
+
+
: Parameter setup keys
FUNC
PARA
Press
with
held down in the basic display state to move to selection of the setting
group (major items) in the parameter setup state.
PROG
: Program setup (programming) keys
PROG
FUNC
Press
with
held down in the program operation mode in the basic display state to
move to the program setup (programming) state.
PROG
FUNC
Press
with
held down in the program setup state to change the No. of the program
to be set up in ascending order.
FUNC
FUNC
FUNC
+
+
+
: Program No. change keys
FUNC
Press
with
held down in the program setup state to change the No. of the program to
be set up in descending order.
CLR
ENT
: Program item delete keys
CLR
FUNC
Press
setting.
with
held down during entry of settings in the program setup state to clear the
: Segment insert/delete keys
ENT
FUNC
Press
with
held down at SP or time item in the program setup state to move to the
segment insert/delete screen.
PROG
+
: Program copy keys
PROG
Press
with
held down in the program operation READY mode in the basic display
state to move to the program copy screen.
FUNC
CLR
DISP
+
+
: General reset keys
CLR
DISP
FUNC
Press
and
with
held down in the READY AUTO mode in the basic display
state to move to the general reset confirmation screen.
■ Loader jack
This jack is for connecting the loader. Objects other than the loader plug should not be
inserted into this jack.
The loader jack is not isolated from internal digital circuits.
Be sure to cap the loader jack when it is not in use.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
2-3 Input Type and Range No.
■ Inputs
■ Thermocouple
Input Format Range No. Code
Temp. Range (°C)
Temp. Range (°F)
K (CA)
0
1
K09
K08
K04
K29
K44
K46
E08
J08
0 to 1200
0.0 to 800.0
0.0 to 400.0
-200 to 1200
-200.0 to 300.0
-200.0 to 200.0
0.0 to 800.0
0.0 to 800.0
-200.0 to 300.0
0 to 1800
0 to 2400
0 to 1600
0 to 750
K (CA)
K (CA)
2
K (CA)
3
-300 to 2400
-300 to 700
-300 to 400
0 to 1800
0 to 1600
-300 to 700
0 to 3300
0 to 3100
0 to 3100
o to 4200
0 to 2552
0 to 3400
32 to 2372
32 to 2372
32 to 2372
-300 to +750
-300 to +1600
—
K (CA)
4
K (CA)
5
E (CRC)
J (IC)
6
7
T (CC)
8
T44
B18
R16
S16
W23
W14
D19
Z13
U13
Y13
Z08
Z07
Z06
B (PR30-6)
R (PR13)
S (PR10)
W (WRe5-26)
W (WRe5-26)
PR40-20
Ni-Ni-Mo
N
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0 to 1600
0 to 1600
0 to 2300
0 to 1400
0 to 1900
0 to 1300
0 to 1300
PL II
0 to 1300
DIN U
-200.0 to +400.0
-200.0 to +800.0
0.0 to +300.0K
DIN L
Golden iron
chromel
■ Resistance temperature detector (RTD)
Input Format Range No. Code
Temp. Range (°C)
Temp. Range (°F)
JIS’89 Pt100
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
F50
F46
F32
F36
F38
F33
F05
F03
F01
P50
P46
P32
P36
P38
P33
P05
P03
P01
-200.0 to 500.0
-200.0 to 200.0
-100.0 to 150.0
-50.0 to 200.0
-60.0 to 40.0
-40.0 to 60.0
0.0 to 500.0
-300 to 900
-300 to 400
(IEC Pt100Ω)
-150.0 to 300.0
-50.0 to 400.0
-76.0 to 104.0
-40.0 to 140.0
0.0 to 900.0
0.0 to 500.0
0.0 to 200.0
-300 to 900
0.0 to 300.0
0.00 to 100.00
-200.0 to 500.0
-200.0 to 200.0
-100.0 to 150.0
-50.0 to 200.0
-60.0 to 40.0
-40.0 to 60.0
0.0 to 500.0
JIS’89 J Pt100
-300 to 400
-150.0 to 300.0
-50.0 to 400.0
-76.0 to 104.0
-40.0 to 140.0
0.0 to 900.0
0.0 to 500.0
0.0 to 200.0
0.0 to 300.0
0.00 to 100.00
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2. NAMES & FUNCTIONS OF PARTS
■ dc current, dc voltage
Input Format Range No. Code Range (programmable)
4 to 20mA
0 to 20mA
0 to 10mA
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
C01
C08
M01
L02
L01
L04
L08
V01
L05
L07
-10 to +10mV
0 to 100mV
0 to 1V
-1999 to 9999
-1 to +1V
1 to 5V
0 to 5V
0 to 10V
Handling Precautions
• The unit of code Z06 is Kelvin (K)
• The lower limit readout of code B18 is 20°C (68°F).
The lower limit readout (°C) of codes K44, K46, T44, Z08 and Z07 is -199.9°C.
• The lower limit readout (°C) of codes F50, F46, P50 and P46 is -199.9°C.
• The upper limit readout (°C) of codes F01 and P01.
• The PV lower limit alarm does not occur with code F50.
However, note that the PV lower limit alarm occurs at a disconnection when
input has been downscaled when input is disconnected during setup.
• The number of digits past the decimal point for dc current and dc voltage is
programmable within the range 0 to 3.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3. MOUNTING
3-1 External Dimensions
Unit: mm
(18)
15
159.5
137
96
A
B
A
B
Mounting bracket 81405411-001
Soft dust-proof cover set (sold separately)
81446087-001
Hard dust-proof cover set (sold separately)
81446083-001
Terminal cover set (sold separately) 81446084-001
A-A
B-B
Terminal screw
37
78.4
Back plate
Add-on terminal base
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3. MOUNTING
3-2 Panel Cutout Dimensions
Use a steel panel of at least 2mm in thickness for mounting the controller.
Unit: mm
Panel cutout dimensions
Panel cutout dimensions during multiple mounted
(recommended)
+0.8
92
0
46
96 x (N - 1)
96 x N - 4
46
N=number of units installed
Panel cutout dimensions when mounting units horizontally and vertically (recommended)
99 min. (when horizontally mounted)
(107 min. when hard dust-prevention
cover is used)
Handling Precautions
When mounting the controller, take care to prevent the temperature at the lower
surface of the controller’s case from exceeding the operating temperature range
(0 to 50°C), particularly when mounting vertically or during multiple mounting.
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3. MOUNTING
3-3 Mounting
WARNING
Before wiring, or removing/mounting the DCP301, be sure to turn the power
OFF. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.
Do not disassemble the DCP301. Doing so might cause electric shock or
faulty operation.
CAUTION
Use the DCP301 within the operating ranges recommended in the specifi-
cations (temperature, humidity, voltage, vibration, shock, mounting direc-
tion, atmosphere, etc.). Failure to do so might cause fire or faulty operation.
Do not block ventilation holes. Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.
Do not allow lead clippings, chips or water to enter the controller case.
Doing so might cause fire or faulty operation.
■ Mounting locations
Avoid installing the DCP301 in the following locations:
• Locations outside of the operating temperature range (0 to 50°C) and operating humid-
ity range (10 to 90%RH)
• Locations subject to sulfide gas or other flammable gases
• Locations subject to dust or oil smoke
• Locations subject to the direction sunlight, wind or rain
• Locations that directly subject the body to vibration or impact
• Locations under high-voltage lines, near welders or near sources of electrical noise
• Locations near (within 15m) of high-voltage ignition equipment such as boilers
• Locations where magnetic fields are generated
• Locations subject to flammable liquids or moisture
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3. MOUNTING
■ Noise generating sources and countermeasures
• Generally, the following generate electrical noise:
(1) Relays and contacts
(2) Solenoid coils, solenoid valves
(3) Power lines (in particular, 90Vac min.)
(4) Induction loads
(5) Inverters
(6) Motor commutators
(7) Phase angle control SCR
(8) Wireless communications equipment
(9) Welding equipment
(10) High-voltage ignition equipment
• If the influence of electrical noise cannot be eliminated, we recommend taking the
following countermeasures:
- Provision of a CR filters for fast-rising noise
Recommended CR filter: Model No. 81446365-001
- Provision of a varister for noise with a high wave height
Recommended varister: Model No. 81446366-001 (100V)
81446367-001 (200V)
Handling Precautions
The varister may become short-circuited when trouble occurs. Pay attention to
this when providing a varister on a controller.
■ Dust-proof cover
Use the dust-proof cover when using the controller in a dusty or dirty location, and to
prevent inadvertent operation.
Two dust proof-covers are provided, hard or soft, each with the following differing func-
tions.
Type
Hard
Soft
Confirmation on Display Operation
x
indicates that a function can be used.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3. MOUNTING
■ Mounting method
Panel
Mounting bracket 81405411-001
Mounting bracket
• Firmly secure the top and bottom of the controller by the mounting brackets.
• When mounting the controller, secure by lower mounting bracket (1) first.
(2)
Mounting bracket
Panel
Panel
(1)
Handling Precautions
To secure the controller, tighten the screw on the mounting bracket (supplied)
until there is no more play and then tighten a further full turn. Take care not to
overtighten the screw. Doing so might deform the case.
• Keep the mounting angle to within 10° from the horizontal at both the controller rear
top and bottom.
Lift up from rear by
10° max.
Pull down from rear by
10° max.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-1 Wiring Precautions
WARNING
Before connecting the DCP301 to the measurement target or external con-
trol circuits, make sure that the FG terminal is properly grounded (100Ω
max.).
Failure to do so might cause electric shock or fire.
Before wiring, or removing/mounting the DCP301, be sure to turn the power
OFF. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.
Do not touch electrically charged parts such as the power terminals. Doing
so might cause electric shock.
CAUTION
Wire the DCP301 properly according to predetermined standards. Also
wire the DCP301 using designed power leads according to recognized
installation methods.
Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.
Do not allow lead clippings, chips or water to enter the DCP301 case. Do-
ing so might cause fire or faulty operation.
Inputs to the current input terminals (31) and (33) on the DCP301 should
be within the current and voltage ranges listed in the specifications.
Failure to do so might cause electric shock or faulty operation.
Firmly tighten the terminal screws at the torque listed in the specifications.
Insufficient tightening of terminal screws might cause electric shock or fire.
Do not use unused terminals on the DCP301 as relay terminals.
Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty operation.
We recommend attaching the terminal cover (sold separately) after wiring
the DCP301. Failure to do so might cause electric shock, fire or faulty op-
eration.
Use the relays on the DCP301 within the service life listed in the specifica-
tions.
Continued use of the relays after the recommended service life might cause
fire or faulty operation.
Use induced lighting surge preventive device if there is the risk of power
surges caused by lightning.
Failure to do might cause fire or faulty operation.
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling Precautions
• Before wiring the DCP301, check the controller catalog No. and terminal Nos.
on the label on the rear of the body. After wiring the DCP301, be sure to check
the wiring for any mistakes.
• Maintain a distance of at least 50cm between I/O leads or communications
leads and the power lead. Also, do not pass these leads through the same
piping or wiring duct.
• When wiring with crimped terminals, take care to prevent contact with adjacent
terminals.
• When connecting the DCP301’s thermocouples in parallel to other controllers,
make sure that the total input impedance of the other controller is at least
1MΩ.
If the input impedance is less than 1MΩ, the DCP301 may not be able to detect
sensor disconnection.
• When inputting the DCP301’s I/O (parallel connection in case of input) to an A/
D converter or analog scanner, read data may fluctuate.
To prevent this, adopt one of the following measures.
(1) Use a low-speed, integrating type A/D converter.
(2) Insert an isolator without a switching power supply between the DCP301
and A/D converter.
(3) Average data on a personal computer when reading data.
(4) If possible, set a filter for the input.
• Provide the wiring for the instrument power supply with a mains power shutoff
switch within reach of the instrument operator.
• Provide the wiring for the instrument power supply with a delayed operation
type (T) 1A current rating, 250V voltage rating fuse. (IEC 127)
• Devices and systems to be connected to this unit must have the basic insula-
tion sufficient to withstand the maximum operating voltage levels of the power
supply and input/output parts.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-2 Compensating Lead
In the case of thermocouple input, connect the bare thermocouple lead to the terminal. If the thermocouple is located
a long way from the DCP301 or the thermocouple is connected to a terminal, extend the connection using a compen-
sating lead and then connect to the terminal. Use shielded compensating leads only.
• For I/O other than thermocouples, use JCS-364 shielded instrument polyethylene insu-
lated vinyl sheath cable or equivalent product. (This is generally referred to “twisted
shielded cable for instruments.”) The following cables are recommended.
Fujikura Ltd.
2-core IPEV-S-0.9mm2 x 1P
3-core ITEV-S-0.9mm2 x 1T
Hitachi Cable Co. 2-core KPEV 0.9mm2 x 1P
3-core KTEV-S-0.9mm2 x 1T
• Shielded, multi-core microphone cord (MVVS) can be used if there is little electro-
magnetic induction.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-3 Terminal Connections
Use crimped terminals that fit onto M3.5 screws.
Unit: mm
3.7dia.
Handling Precautions
• When installing the DCP301 in locations subject to vibration or impact, be sure
to use round crimped terminals to prevent the lead from coming loose from the
terminal.
• When wiring with crimped terminals, take care to prevent contact with adjacent
terminals.
• The recommended tightening torque for the terminal screws is 0.78 to
0.98N•m.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-4 Layout of Terminals and Recommended Lead Draw-out
Direction
Wiring is carried out on the standard terminal base or add-on terminal base. The following diagram shows the recom-
mended draw-out directions for the leads on the standard terminal base.
The lead draw-out directions are the same when using the add-on terminal base.
(11) to (20) to left (
)
(21) to (26) to left (
)
(26) to (34) to right (
)
(1) to (10) to left (
)
Lead draw-out direction
Lead draw-out direction
Standard terminal base
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-5 Connecting the Ground and Power Supply
■ Power supply
Connect the DCP301 to a single-phase power supply for controllers, and take measures
to prevent the influence of electrical noise.
200/200V,
100/100V
Recommended
line filter
insulated transformer
DCP301
81446364-001
Instrument
power supply
1
E
2
3
GND
4
1
2
3
~
GND
GND
Other circuits
Handling Precautions
• If the power supply generates a lot of electrical noise, we recommend inserting
an insulating transformer in the power circuit and using a line filter.
Recommended line filter: Model No. 81446364-001
• After providing anti-noise measures, do not bundle primary and secondary power
leads together, or pass them through the same piping or wiring duct.
■ Ground
When it is difficult to ground shielded cable, prepare a separate ground terminal (earth
bar).
Ground type: 100Ω max.
Ground cable: 2mm sq. min soft-copper wire (AWG14)
Cable length: Max. 20m
DCP301
FG
3
terminal
GND terminal plate
GND (100Ω max.)
Shielded cable
Handling Precautions
Use only the FG terminal (3) on the DCP301 for grounding. Do not ground across
other terminals.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-6 Wiring of Standard and Add-on Terminal Base
■ Standard terminal layout
5G output
6D output
OD output 5K output
Instrument
power supply
External switch input (RSW)
2G output 3D output Auxiliary output
90 to 264Vac
1
2
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
RSW1
RSW2
RSW3
RSW4
2
3
50/60Hz
FG (Frame GND)
1
4 to 20mA
voltage
3
Relay
Relay
Output 1
Output 2
Y
T
4
EV1
COM
5
Auxiliary
output 1
4 to 20mA
voltage
G
6
Current
input
mAdc
EV2
EV3
Event outputs
7
Input
Auxiliary
output 2
Resistance
temperature
detector
8
4 to 20mA
V, mV
9
Voltage input
*
10
Thermocouple
input
Auxiliary output
4 to 20mA
Recorder, etc.
* On 2G, 3D or 5K models, (17) and (18) are the auxiliary outputs.
On 0D, 5G or 6D models, (14) and (15), and (17) and (18) are the auxiliary outputs.
■ Add-on terminal layout
External switch
inputs
Time event outputs
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
SG
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
RSW5
RSW6
RSW7
RSW8
RSW9
RSW10
RSW11
RSW12
RS-485
communications
62
63
64
Bias circuit
External
10 to 29Vdc power supply
25
To terminals
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-7 Connecting Inputs (analog inputs)
■ Connecting input 1
Multiple input 1 supports various sensor inputs. Connect as follows according to the
sensor being used.
• Thermocouple input
• RTD input
31
32
33
34
31
32
33
34
C
B
A
• dc voltage input
• dc current input
31
32
33
34
31
32
33
34
mA
V, mV
Handling Precautions
• Applying voltage across dc current input terminals (31) and (33) may cause
faulty operation.
• Take care of polarities (+,-) when wiring inputs.
• Use only shielded cable for wiring inputs.
• When using a thermocouple input, prevent air blasts from coming into contact
with the terminal. Doing so might cause a reading error.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-8 Connecting control outputs (outputs 1, 2)
WARNING
Before wiring, or removing/mounting the DCP301, be sure to turn the power
OFF. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.
■ Relay output (0D)
Connect as follows.
11
12
13
Contact rating, resistive load
5A (30Vdc/120Vac)
4A (240Vac)
Load
Power supply
Minimum switching current: 100mA
Handling Precautions
When switching small currents, connect a bleeder resistor to allow current flow of
the minimum relay switching input (100mA min.).
■ Current output (5G)
Connect as follows.
11
12
13
Actuator
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc
Resistive load 600Ω max.
Handling Precautions
4 to 20mAdc and 0 to 20mAdc can be selected in setup data C 9 0.
■ Position-proportional output (2G)
Connect as follows paying attention to the switching direction.
2
11
Open side
Contact rating
4A (120Vac, cosø=0.4)
2A (240Vac, cosø=0.4)
Load
Load
3
12
13
Power supply
1
Closed side
Y
Open
T
14
15
16
Feedback resistance
100 to 2500Ω
G
Closed
Handling Precautions
• The life of internal relays is limited.
Avoid setting the PID constant in such a way that results in excessive repeated
ON/OFF switching.
• When using a 100/200Vac motor, pay attention to rush current and the contact
rating. If necessary, provide an external auxiliary relay.
• Separate the wiring for motor terminals (11) (12) (13) and feedback resistor
terminals (14) (15) (16).
(Do not wire the leads in the same duct or use 6-core cable. Doing so might
result in faulty controller operation caused by electrical noise when the motor is
started up.)
• When controlling without motor feedback with variable parameter M .-Cset to
“2”, terminals (14) (15) (16) need not be connected.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
■ Voltage output (6D)
Connect as follows.
11
SSR
2 to 22mAdc
12
13
With current adjustment function
(setup: C78)
Handling Precautions
Voltage output is reliant on an internal fixed-current circuit.
Set the current value in the setup data so that the optimum voltage is obtained
matched to the conditions of the SSR in use and load.
Factory setting: general-purpose SSR voltage value.
■ Heat/cool output (3D)
Connect as follows.
11
Output 1
Load
Contact rating, resistive load
5A (30Vdc/120Vac)
4A (240Vac)
12
Power supply
13
Minimum switching current: 100mA
14
Output 2
Load
Contact rating, resistive load
5A (30Vdc/120Vac)
4A (240Vac)
15
Power supply
16
Minimum switching current: 100mA
Handling Precautions
When switching small currents, connect a bleeder resistor to allow current flow of
the minimum relay switching input (100mA min.).
■ Heat/cool output (5K)
Connect as follows.
Output 1
11
•
Current output:
Load (SSR)
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc
Load resistance 600Ω max.
Voltage output:
12
13
•
2 to 22mAdc
With current adjustment function (setup: C78)
Output 2
14
15
16
Current output:
•
Load (SSR)
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc
Load resistance 600Ω max.
Voltage output:
•
2 to 22mAdc
With current adjustment function (setup: C79)
Handling Precautions
Current output and voltage output can be selected by setups C 7 5 and C 7 6.
Voltage output is reliant on an internal fixed-current circuit.
Set the current value in the setup data so that the optimum voltage is obtained
matched to the conditions of the SSR in use and load.
Factory setting: general-purpose SSR voltage value.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-9 Connecting auxiliary outputs (outputs 2, 3)
Optional auxiliary outputs can be added on.
WARNING
Before wiring, or removing/mounting the DCP301, be sure to turn the power
OFF. Failure to do so might cause electric shock.
■ 0D, 5G, 6D auxiliary outputs
14
15
16
Auxiliary output 1
(output 2)
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc
Resistive load 600Ω max.
Receiver
17
18
19
Auxiliary output 2
(output 3)
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc
Resistive load 600Ω max.
Receiver
Handling Precautions
• 4 to 20mAdc and 0 to 20mAdc can be selected in setup data C 9 0.
• Use shielded cable only.
■ 2G, 3D, 5K auxiliary outputs
17
18
19
Auxiliary output 2
(output 3)
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc
Resistive load 600Ω max.
Receiver
Auxiliary output 1 is not provided for 2G, 3D and 5K outputs.
Handling Precautions
• 4 to 20mAdc and 0 to 20mAdc can be selected in setup data C 9 0.
• Use shielded cable only.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-10 Connecting Event Output (relay output)
Event outputs EV1 and EV2 are 1a contact, and event output EV3 is 1a1b. Event outputs are connected on the
standard terminal base.
Standard terminal base
4
Contact rating, resistive load
1A (30/250Vdc)
EV1 1a
EV2 1a
EV3 1a1b
Load
Power supply
Load
Power supply
5
6
Contact rating, resistive load
1A (30/250Vdc)
7
8
Contact rating, resistive load
2A (30/250Vdc)
Load
Power supply
9
Minimum switching current: 10mA
10
Handling Precautions
When switching small currents, connect a bleeder resistor to allow current flow of
the minimum relay switching input (10mA min.).
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-11 Connecting Time Event Output (open-collector)
Optional time event outputs T1 to T5 (open-collector outputs) can be added on. Time event outputs are connected on
the add-on terminal base.
Add-on terminal base
T1
Load
49
Maximum load current:
OFF leakage current:
70mA/load
0.1mA max.
T2
Load
50
51
52
53
55
56
T3
Load
T4
Load
T5
Load
Bias circuit
External power supply
10 to 29Vdc
Handling Precautions
• Be sure to connect terminal (55) to the + terminal of the external power supply.
Otherwise, open-collector output will not function.
• Do not short-circuit the + terminal of the external power supply and terminals
(49) to (53) on the DCP301. Doing so will cause faulty open-collector output.
(The DCP301 does not contain a short-circuit prevention circuit.)
• When connecting to a semiconductor load such as a programmable controller
(sequencer), select a module whose current directions are matching.
Use a module that does not operate by leakage current when the open-collec-
tor output of the DCP301 is OFF.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-12 Connecting External Switch (RSW) Input
The DCP301 is provided with four external switch inputs as standard (eight optional). The optional eight inputs are
located on the add-on terminal base. Wire the external switch inputs across the standard and add-on terminal bases.
Standard terminal base
RSW1
21
Contact
RSW2
22
Add-on terminal base
Contact
RSW3
RSW5
RSW6
RSW7
RSW8
RSW9
RSW10
RSW11
RSW12
23
24
25
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Contact
RSW4
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
Contact
COM
Handling Precautions
• The external switch inputs on the DCP301 have built-in power supplies (open
voltage 12Vdc). Be sure to use no-voltage contacts for external contacts.
• Use no-voltage contacts such as gold contacts whose small current can be
switched ON/OFF. On some relay contacts, the small current cannot be switched
ON/OFF. Use no-voltage contacts having a sufficient minimum switching ca-
pability with respect to the contact current and open voltage of the DCP301.
• When using a semiconductor (e.g. open-collector) as a no-voltage contact, use
a semiconductor whose contact terminal voltages at contact ON are 3V max.,
and whose leakage current at contact OFF is 0.1mA.
• External switch inputs on the DCP301/302 can be connected in parallel.
When connecting in parallel with other controllers, thoroughly check the condi-
tions of the other controller before configuring the control system.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
■ Internal circuit for controller components for connecting external switch inputs
Standard terminal base
12Vdc
Add-on terminal base
12Vdc
21
41
48
12Vdc
12Vdc
External
switch
input
External
switch
input
24
25
Internal circuit
Internal circuit
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-13 Connecting for Communications
Some controller models support the RS-485 communications interface. Select the RS-485 communications models
by selected the required catalog No.
Connect as follows.
Handling Precautions
The DCP301 operates as a slave station.
■ RS-485 interface
Add-on terminal base
SDA
57
SDB
58
RDA
59
RDB
60
SG
61
Handling Precautions
• Multi-drop connection of slave stations is possible.
• Make sure that different addresses are set for each slave station.
• Provide terminating resistor (total of 4 in the case of a 5-wire system connec-
tion) on both ends of the communications path. Use terminating resistor of
150Ω±5%, 1/2W min.
• In the case of a 3-wire system connection, short-circuit terminals (57) and (59),
(58) and (60) on the DCP301.
• Do not short-circuit the RDA and RDB, or SDA and SDB terminals. Doing so
might damage the DCP301.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
■ 5-wire system RS-485 mutual connection
Terminating resistor
Slave station DCP301
SDA
57
Terminating resistor
SDB
58
RDA
59
RDB
60
SG
61
FG
Shielded cable
Master station
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
FG
Slave station DCP301
Shielded cable
SDA
57
SDB
58
RDA
59
Handling Precautions
RDB
60
Be sure to connect SG terminals each
others.
Failure to do so might cause unstable
communications.
SG
61
FG
Slave station DCP301
Shielded cable
SDA
57
SDB
58
RDA
59
Terminating resistor
RDB
60
SG
61
Terminating resistor
FG
Provide terminating resistor of 150Ω±5%, 1/2W min. at both ends of the communications path.
Grounding of the shielded FG terminal should be carried out at only one end and not both ends.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
■ 3-wire system RS-485 mutual connection
Terminating resistor
Slave station DCP301
SDA
57
SDB
RDA
RDB
SG
58
59
60
61
FG
Master station
RDA
RDB
SDA
SDB
SG
Shielded cable
*
*
FG
Slave station DCP301
Shielded cable
SDA
SDB
RDA
RDB
SG
57
58
59
60
61
Handling Precautions
Be sure to connect SG terminals each
others.
Failure to do so might cause unstable
communications.
FG
Shielded cable
Slave station DCP301
SDA
57
SDB
RDA
RDB
SG
58
59
60
61
Terminating resistor
FG
Provide terminating resistor of 150Ω±5%, 1/2W min. at both ends of the communications path.
Grounding of the shielded FG terminal should be carried out at only one end and not both ends.
When there are only three RS-485 terminals, terminals marked * are wired internally.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4. WIRING
4-14 Isolating Inputs and Outputs
The following figures show isolation between inputs and outputs. Solid lines show isolated items, and dotted lines
show non-isolated items.
■ Control outputs 0D, 5G, 6D, 3D, 5K
31
32
33
34
11
12
Input 1
(full multiple-input PV
supported)
Output 1
(relay, current, voltage output)
Output 2
(relay, current, voltage output,
auxiliary output)
14
15
Output 3
(auxiliary output)
17
18
Loader communications
I/O
Loader jack
Event output 1
(relay output 1a)
4
5
12 external switch inputs
21
6
7
Event output 2
(relay output 1a)
25
41
8
Event output 3
(relay output 1a1b)
9
48
57
10
Communications I/O
(RS-485)
Time event outputs 1 to 5
(open-collector output)
49
56
61
Handling Precautions
The loader jack is not isolated from internal digital circuits.
Be sure to cap the loader jack when it is not in use.
■ Control output 2G
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
31
Input 1
(full multiple-input PV
supported)
Output 1
(control output 1a relay x 2)
32
33
34
Motor feedback input
Output 3
(auxiliary output)
Loader communications
I/O
Loader jack
Event output 1
(relay output 1a)
4
5
12 external switch inputs
21
6
7
Event output 2
(relay output 1a)
25
41
8
Event output 3
(relay output 1a1b)
9
48
57
10
Communications I/O
(RS-485)
Time event outputs 1 to 5
(open-collector output)
49
56
61
Handling Precautions
The loader jack is not isolated from internal digital circuits.
Be sure to cap the loader jack when it is not in use.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5-1 Data
■ Data types
The DCP301 supports the following data types.
For further details, see Chapter 7, Parameter Setup and Chapter 8, Program Setup.
Data that can be changed even in RUN mode
Data
Parameters
Variable parameters
Event configuration data
PID parameters
Setup data
Data (e.g. event type)
Control parameters of PID sets 1 to 8
Basic data that can be changed only in
READY mode
Linearization table data
Table data
Constant-value operation Data (e.g. SP, PID) of constant-value operation
data
Pattern
SP and time data
Program
Event
Events 1 to 3 data
Time event
Time events 1 to 5 time data
PID set No.
G.Soak
PV start
Cycle
PID set No. data for use in control
G.Soak ON/OFF data
PV START ON/OFF data
Cycle count data
Pattern link
Pattern link destination program No. data
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5-2 Program Patterns
■ Patterns
SP and time comprise the settings for a single segment in a pattern. Up to 30 segments
can be linked to create a broken-line whose vertical axis is SP and horizontal axis is time.
This system is called the “RAMP-X” system.
SP setting: Within range of SP limitter upper and lower limits
Timesetting: 0 to 99h, 59min or 0 to 99min, 59s
(Select the time unit in setup data C 6 4.)
SP is the point that corresponds to the time elapsed in the current segment on a straight
line made by jointing the start point (SP setting value of the previous segment) to an end
point (SP setting value of the current segment).
Accordingly, segments are categorized as follows:
• Rising ramp (rising ramp, rising tendency)
Previous segment SP setting value < current segment SP setting value
• Falling ramp (falling ramp, falling tendency)
Previous segment SP setting value > current segment SP setting value
• Soak (soak)
Previous segment SP setting value = current segment SP setting value
In the case of the No.1 segment, both the start and end points become the soak segment of
the No.1 segment SP setting values.
SP (other than No.1 segment) is calculated as by the following formula:
SP = (current segment SP setting value - previous segment SP setting value) x (current
segment elapsed time ÷ current segment time setting) + previous segment SP set-
ting
Time setting of current segment
SP setting value of
current segment
SP setting value of
previous segment
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Events 1 to 3
Events 1 to 3 are event configuration data. These are used after setting the event type,
event standby, hysteresis and ON delay time.
A total of three event types are available: PV type events, controller status events, and
time events.
■ PV type events
• Basic specifications
The following page shows event type PV, deviation, absolute value deviation, SP, MV
and MFB. In the figures, the thick lines show ON-OFF changes in state. The upper line
expresses the ON state, and the lower line the OFF state.
EV and H stand for event setting value and hysteresis, respectively. Output in the
READY state is OFF.
• Event standby
Events function as follows when event standby has been set to ON.
- If the controller is in the
state in the figure when changing from the READY to
the RUN mode and after restoring the power, operation is the same as when event
standby is set to OFF. The up-facing arrow in the figure indicates a change to ON,
and a down-facing arrow indicates a change to OFF.
- If the controller is outside the
state in the figure when changing from the READY
to the RUN mode and after restoring the power, the state is OFF. After entering the
state, the up-facing arrow in the figure indicates a change to ON, and a down-
facing arrow indicates a change to OFF.
• Event ON delay
The event No. to apply the delay to and the delay time can be set regardless of event
type. “Delay” functions to turn output ON when the event is continuously ON for the
preset delay time after the event OFF→ON condition is satisfied.
When event ON delay is combined with event standby, event standby must first be
canceled before event ON delay functions.
• Segment progression
- Output is OFF until the program progresses to the segment containing the event
setting.
- When the program progresses to the segment containing the event setting, event ON/
OFF operation is carried out according to the event setting value.
- The previous setting is valid until the program progresses to a segment containing a
new event setting.
For this reason, set as follows to disable the event set in the previous segment from a
certain segment onwards:
Direct action events: Upper limit value of event setting
Reverse action events: Lower limit value of event setting
Note, however, that some types of event turn ON even if events are set as shown
above.
- When the program has progressed to the No.1 segment by the cycle or pattern link
functions, the previous setting is disabled. Output is OFF unless the No.1 segment
contains an event setting.
• Other
On 5G output models, when setup data C 1 8 is set to 1, and SP output (programmer
functions) is selected, the MV direct/reverse event does not function.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
PV reverse
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
H
H
PV
PV
PV
PV
PV
PV
EV
EV
Deviation direct
Deviation reverse
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
H
H
SP+EV
SP+EV
Absolute value deviation direct
Absolute value deviation reverse
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
H
H
H
H
EV EV
SP
EV
EV
SP
SP direct
SP reverse
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
H
H
H
H
SP
SP
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
EV
MV direct
MV reverse
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
H
MV
MV
MFB direct
MFB reverse
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
H
MFB
MFB
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Controller status events
Controller status events are turned ON and OFF according to the controller mode, alarm
status and other statuses.
Though the event standby function does not function, the ON delay function does.
Event setting values (operating point), hysteresis and event standby are not set.
• Basic operations
The following basic operation types are provided:
RUN+HOLD+FAST+END
READY
RUN
HOLD
FAST
END
G.Soak standby
MANUAL
Auto-tuning executing
Constant-value operation
MFB estimated position control, sum of all alarms
PV range alarm
Controller alarms
Low battery voltage
Console setup in progress
Loader setup in progress
ADV
When the DCP301 reaches the state designated by the event type, the event is turned
ON. Otherwise, the event is OFF.
• Alarms
Alarms are divided into PV range alarm groups (alarm code Nos. 01 to 16) and control-
ler alarm groups (alarm code Nos. 70 to 99, and low battery voltage).
When the event type is set to the sum of all alarms, the alarm turns ON even if at least
one of the alarms occurs.
When the event type is set to PV range alarm, the alarm turns ON even if at least one of
the alarms in the PV range alarm group occurs.
When the event type is set to controller alarm, the alarm turns ON even if at least one
of the alarms in the controller alarm group occurs.
• ADV
This is ON for 1s after executing program advance. The event ON delay is disabled
and a delay is not applied.
■ Time events
When the event 1 to 3 type is set to time event, the event can be used in the same way
as time events 1 to 5. However, note that events 1 to 3 do not have segment No. event
functions.
Though the event standby function does not function, the ON delay function does.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Time events 1 to 5
Either of time events or segment No. events can be selected by the time event type item
in the event configuration data setup.
■ Time events
The ON and OFF times or only the ON time can
be set for each event No. and segment. The fol-
lowing describes ON/OFF of output.
Segment
ON time
1
<
ON OFF
• When the ON time is smaller than the OFF
time, output is ON for the duration from the
ON time to the OFF time.
OFF time
Output ON
Output OFF
(See segments 1, 6 and 7 in the figure.)
• When only the ON time is set, output is ON
for the during from the ON time to the seg-
ment end point.
Segment
ON time
2
3
(See segments 2 and 5 in the figure.)
Output turns OFF at
end of segment even if
OFF time is not set.
OFF time
Output ON
Output OFF
• When both the ON time and OFF time are not
set, output is OFF.
(See segment 3 in the figure.)
• Setting only the OFF time without an ON time
is not possible.
(See segment 3B in the figure.)
Segment
ON time
3B
3C
No ON
• Setting an ON time to be greater to or equal
than the OFF time is not possible.
(See segment 3C in the figure.)
OFF time
Output ON
Output OFF
=
>
ON OFF ON OFF
• Only ON and OFF times set within the seg-
ment time are valid. Times straddling the next
segment are invalid. The ON and OFF times Segment
4
5
set in the next segment are valid.
(See segments 4 and 5 in the figure.)
Segment time
ON time
OFF time
Accordingly, the ON and OFF times settings
ON-OFF time is invalid
even if set in excess of
segment 4 time.
at the segment end point are ignored.
Advance to
segment 5
Output ON
However, ON and OFF times set for segment
end points when the END mode is shifted to
Output OFF
are valid.
Segment
5
6
(See segment 9 in the figure, and compare with
segment 10 in the END mode.)
ON time
=
ON 0
• When the ON time is set to 0 (no OFF time
setting, or OFF time is greater than 0), output
becomes OFF at time 0.
OFF time
Output ON
Output OFF
ON
continued
If output at the previous segment end point was
ON at this time, the output status at the seg-
ment switching point does not momentarily
become OFF.
Segment
ON time
7
G.Soak standby
(See segments 5 and 6 in the figure.)
OFF time
Output ON
Output OFF
• The G.Soak standby time is not included in the
ON and OFF times.
(See segment 7 in the figure.)
Segment time start
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
• If the ON time is set to 0 in the case of G.Soak
standby, output becomes ON from the G.Soak
standby state, and the ON time is started at
completion of the G.Soak standby time.
Segment
ON time
8
G.Soak standby
Segment 8 time start
=
When 0N 0, output turns
ON when there is input to
segment 8.
OFF time
Output ON
Output OFF
The output time = G.Soak time + OFF time
(See segment 8 in the figure.)
• ON and OFF time settings the same time as
the segment end point are valid in the case of
the final segment END mode.
Segment
ON time
9
(See segment 10 in the figure.)
=
ON segment time
OFF time
Output ON
Output OFF
Segment
ON time
10
Segment time
END mode
=
ON segment time
OFF time
Output ON
Output OFF
■ Segment No. events
The current segment No. is output as binary code.
When all of T1 to T5 are selected as segment No. events in the time event type setup, all
ON-OFF operations are as shown in the following table.
When T1 to T4 are assigned in part to segment No. events, only the assigned time events
operate as shown in the following table, and the remaining events operate as regular time
events.
Segment
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
Event No.
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Segment
No.
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Event No.
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ PID set selection
• Eight sets of PID parameters, PID1 to PID8, are used for
control operation. When the PID set No. is set to each seg-
ment by designating the PID set segment, control output is
calculated by each of the PID parameters.
• There are two ways of selecting PID sets: by designating the
PID set segment and PID set auto-switching. The method
can be selected by setting setup data C 1 1.
PID set No.
1
2
3
4
PID set segment designation
C 1 1 set to 0: Designation of PID set segment
C 1 1 set to 1: PID set auto-switching
Zone 8
Zone 7
Zone 6
These two methods cannot be set simultaneously.
C P. 1 7
C P. 1 6
C P. 1 5
C P. 1 4
C P. 1 3
C P. 1 2
C P. 1 1
Note
When setup data C 1 1 is set to 1, PID items in the program
setup are not displayed.
All SP ranges
are divided to
eight zones.
Zone 5
Zone 4
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone 1
• By designation of PID set segment, the PID set No. is set for
each segment, and control output is calculated by each of the
PID parameters.
• By PID set auto-switching, the SP full-scale is divided into
eight zones according to the settings of C P . 1 1 to C P . 1 7,
and the PID constant to be used according to the SP value is
automatically selected to calculate the control output.
PID set automatic switching
■ G.Soak (guarantee soak)
G.Soak ON/OFF and G.Soak width can be set for each seg-
ment. The G.Soak time can also be set by the variable param-
eter G S . t item.
SP
The G.Soak function ensures a segment execution time with
PV close to SP. G.Soak functions not only in soak segments
but also in ramp segments.
G.Soak width
SP
PV
G.Soak width
At the segment start point, PV and SP are compared, and the
absolute value of the resulting deviation continues for the
G.Soak time or longer. When the absolute value is smaller than
the G.Soak width, operation of that segment is started.
Segment set time
Segment execution time
G.Soak standby time
Time count start
Time
The controller is in the G.Soak standby state until this condi-
tion is satisfied, and the linear lamp on the left of the profile
display blinks. The operation state is the same as hold at the
segment start point (time is set to 0). However, note that in the
FAST mode, the controller does not enter the G.Soak standby
state even if G.Soak is set to ON. The G.Soak standby state
can also be canceled by external switch output. The following
cancel conditions can be selected by the setup date C 5 2 to
C 5 4 settings.
G.Soak at segment start point
(1) G.Soak cancel when external switch input contact is ON or
PV satisfies the G.Soak cancel conditions
(2) G.Soak cancel when external switch input contact is ON
and PV satisfies the G.Soak cancel conditions
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ PV start
SP pattern
If PV start is set in the program setup, PV is started by
regular RUN operation.
The first point where PV matches the SP in the program
pattern (including bias for both PV and SP) is searched
for, and operation is started from that point.
Current
PV value
Start point
A
A'
(1)
Start point
However, note that if a matching point is not found, op-
eration is started from the beginning of segment 1.
Start point
B
C
(1)'
When PV has started, event operating points and the time
of time events are automatically corrected. If the PV start
function is selected by setup data C 5 2 to C 5 4 settings
relating to external switch input, PV start can be executed
without setting PV start in the program setup.
(1)"
PV start points
PV start is valid for segments in the currently selected
program, and invalid for the segment at the pattern link
destination.
(1) PV starts at point A where the PV value first
crosses the SP pattern.
(1)' PV starts at point B where the PV value first
crosses the SP pattern.
(1)'' Point C of segment 1 is the PV start point
since there is no point where the PV value
crosses the SP value.
■ Cycle
SP
The cycle function is for repeating operation from the No.1
segment of the program pattern to the final set segment
for a preset number of cycles. The number of cycles can
be set up to 9999.
(5)
Cycle 1
(4)
(3)
When a number of cycles “n” is set, the operation count
(6)
becomes “n+1”.
(2)
(1)
When executing cycle operation, operation at the end point
of the final segment is not carried out, and operation is
restarted with the settings of events 1 to 3 and time events
1 to 5 cleared. At this time, PV is not started and opera-
tion starts from the No.1 segment even if PV start is set.
Time
If the SPs at the pattern start and end points do not match,
the SP changes in a stepped manner during cycle opera-
tion.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
■ Pattern link
Program No.2 pattern-linked to program No.1
Program No.1
SP
“pattern link” is a function for linking patterns together.
The link destination program No. is set by the pattern
link item.
When the pattern link item is set to 0 (initial setting),
patterns are not linked. When the No. of the current pro-
gram itself is set to the pattern link item, this creates an
endless loop.
Time
SP
If the SPs at the link source end point and the link desti-
nation start point do not match, the SP changes in a
stepped manner during link operation.
Program No.2
Time
When cycle operation has been set, the pattern link func-
tion works after cycle operation has ended. After pattern
link operation ends, operation begins from the No.1 seg-
ment of the link destination pattern, so operation is re-
started with the settings of events 1 to 3 and time events
1 to 5 cleared.
SP
If PV start is programmed to the link destination pattern,
the PV start function operates after the link is made.
After the link has been made, PID operation is not ini-
tialized, and is continued.
Time
Program No.1
Program No.2
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5-3 Modes
I Mode types
The following modes are available on the DCP301.
Mode
Program operation
READY
AUTO
MANUAL
RUN
AUTO
MANUAL
HOLD
FAST
END
AUTO
MANUAL
AUTO
MANUAL
AUTO
MANUAL
READY
RUN
Constant-value operation
AUTO
MANUAL
AUTO
MANUAL
I Program operation
Operation is carried out according to SP, times, events, etc. set to program patterns No.1
to 19.
I Constant-value operation
Operation is carried out according to SP or events set in the constant-value operation
data. Time events 1 to 5 turn OFF.
I READY
In this mode, the DCP301 is ready for operation.
MV output is fixed, and events to be operated according to event setting values turn OFF.
However, events to be operated according to controller states are active.
Parameters for all of the setup data, some event configuration data and some constant-
value operation data can be set or changed in the READY mode. During program opera-
tion, program pattern Nos.1 to 19 can be selected.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
I RUN
In this mode, the program is running.
MV outputs are active in PID control or ON-OFF control, and events and time events are
active.
In the program operation mode, program operation progresses according to the elapsed
time.
However, note that progress of program operation stops in the same way as the HOLD
mode when the controller is in the G.Soak (Guarantee Soak) standby state.
I HOLD
In this mode, the program is held.
Progress of program operation stops. However, note that MV outputs are active in PID
control or ON-OFF control, and events and time events are active in the same way as in
the RUN mode. The HOLD mode is not available during constant-value operation.
I FAST
In this mode, the program is fast-forwarded.
This mode is like the RUN mode except that progress of the program operation time is
speeded up.
The time scale is selected by the variable parameter F A S T setting.
MV outputs are active in PID control or ON-OFF control, and events and time events are
active.
The controller does not enter the G.Soak standby state even if G.Soak (Guarantee Soak)
is set. The FAST mode is not available during constant-value operation.
I END
In this mode, operation of the program has ended.
MV outputs are active in PID control or ON-OFF control, and events and time events are
active with program operation stopped at the program end point.
The END mode is not available during constant-value operation.
I AUTO
In this mode, program operation is automatic.
MV output is active according to controller control.
(However, note that when programmer functions are selected on 5G output models, SP
output is active according to controller control.)
I MANUAL
In this mode, program operation is manual.
MV output can be changed by
(However, note that when programmer functions are selected on 5G output models, SP
output can be changed by on the console or communications.)
,
,
,
on the console or communications.
,
,
,
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
I Mode transition
I During program operation
The solid lines in the following diagram show mode transition operations. The broken
lines show end of operation.
ADV
ADV
ADV
RESET
RESET
RUN
RESET
HOLD
RUN
END AUTO
READY AUTO
RUN AUTO
RUN MANUAL
HOLD AUTO
END MANUAL
READY MANUAL
HOLD MANUAL
FAST
FAST
HOLD
RUN
FAST AUTO
FAST MANUAL
RESET
ADV
Mode changes to READY or END at end of operation.
• When shifting between the AUTO and MANUAL modes, the modes in the square
frames can be shifted between.
Note
• Selection of the READY or END modes at end of operation is set up in the setup data.
I During constant-value operation
The solid lines in the following diagram shows mode transition operation.
RUN
READY AUTO
RUN AUTO
RESET
READY MANUAL
RUN MANUAL
When shifting between the AUTO and MANUAL modes, the modes in the square frames
can be shifted between.
Note
I Switching between program operation and constant-value operation
In the READY mode, select operation by the constant-value operation data “M .O D E”
operation mode item.
0: Program operation
1: Constant-value operation
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
I Mode transition operations
The following describes mode transition operations.
Though “program end” is not an operation, it is described below as it is a factor in mode
transition.
I RUN
This operation involves shifting to the RUN mode from the READY, HOLD or FAST
modes. To shift from the READY mode to the RUN mode, the DCP301 must be in the
basic display state even in key, external switch input or communication operations.
I HOLD
This operation involves shifting to the HOLD mode from the RUN or FAST modes.
The HOLD mode is not available in the constant-value operation mode.
I RESET
This operation involves shifting to the READY mode from the RUN, HOLD, FAST or
END modes.
In the program operation mode, this mode includes returning to the No.1 segment.
I ADV
This operation involves advancing one segment in the READY, RUN, HOLD or FAST
modes.
The ADV mode is not available in the constant-value operation mode.
I FAST
This operation involves shifting to the FAST mode from the RUN or HOLD modes.
The FAST mode is not available in the constant-value operation mode.
I AUTO
This operation involves shifting to the AUTO mode from the MANUAL mode.
This operation involves shifting to the MANUAL mode from the AUTO mode.
I MANUAL
When the DCP301 enters the MANUAL mode, the basic display state changes as fol-
lows.
- When controller functions are selected, PV and output value (%) are displayed.
- When programmer functions are selected, PV and SP are displayed.
When the DCP301 enters the MANUAL mode from the AUTO mode by external switch
inputs or communications, the display changes to the basic display state even in the pa-
rameter setup or program setup states.
I Program end
When operation progresses in the RUN or FAST modes in the program operation mode,
or when the segment has been advanced in the ADV mode, the program ends when all
end points in the program setup including cycles and pattern links have been reached.
You can select in the setup setting in which of the READY or END modes program
operation ends.
The program does not end in the constant-value operation mode.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
I Mode transition limitations
Mode transition can be carried out operating the console keys, external switching input
and communications. The following table shows which operations are enabled in each of
the modes.
Operation
RUN
HOLD
RESET
ADV *
FAST
(to RUN mode) (to HOLD mode) (to READY mode) (to next segment mode) (to FAST mode)
Com-
muni-
cations
Com-
muni-
cations
Com-
muni-
cations
Com-
muni-
cations
Com-
muni-
cations
Key
—
Key
—
Key
—
Key
—
Key
—
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Original mode
Program READY
—
I
—
I
—
—
—
—
I
—
I
—
—
—
∆
I
I
I
I
—
I
∆
I
I
I
I
—
I
I
I
I
I
—
—
—
—
I
I
I
—
—
—
—
I
I
—
—
—
—
—
I
I
—
—
—
—
operation
RUN
—
I
I
—
I
—
—
I
I
—
I
—
HOLD
FAST
END
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Constant-
value
operation
READY
RUN
—
Operation
MANUAL
AUTO
(to MANUAL mode) (to AUTO mode)
Com-
muni-
cations
Com-
muni-
cations
Key
Key
—
Switch
Switch
Original mode
AUTO
I
—
I
—
I
—
I
—
—
I
—
I
—
I
—
I
Program
operation
MANUAL
AUTO
—
—
Constant-
value
operation
—
MANUAL
I : Operation is enabled.
: Operation is enabled if in basic display state.
∆ : No.1 segment is returned to if controller is still in READY mode.
— : Operation is disabled.
* With ADV by communications, mode transition is not limited to the next segment; the
mode advances to the segment specified in the communications message.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5-4 Controller and Programmer
On 5G output models (output catalog No. appended with 5G), you can choose between use as a controller or a
programmer. Set this in setup data C 1 8. You can also choose between controller or programmer functions even if
the DCP301 is used for program operation or constant-value operation.
The DCP301 is limited to use as a controller at all times on other models.
I Controller
When the DCP301 is used as a controller, PID control operation is carried out according
to PV, SP AND PID setting values, and the resulting manipulated variable (MV) is out-
put as an analog output.
ON-OFF control, heat/cool PID control and 3-position-proportional is also possible de-
pending on the type of output supported by the model of DCP301.
In the MANUAL mode, the MV can be incremented or decremented in the basic display
state by the console keys.
DCP301 controller
MV
PV
Controlled system
I Programmer
When the DCP301 is used as a programmer, PID control operation is not carried out, and
the SP is output in the scaled 4 to 20mA range.
In the MANUAL mode, the SP can be incremented or decremented in the basic display
state by the console keys.
DCP301 programmer
SP output
PV
4 to 20mA
RSP input
Controller
Controller
Controller
MV
Controlled system
MV
Controlled system
MV
Controlled system
PV
PV
PV
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5-5 Input Processing Functions
Input processing is carried out in the order shown below.
Analog input 1
Input range type
Setting: Setup data C03
A/D conversion
Wiring resistance compensation (resistance temperature detector)
(thermocouple)
Cold junction compensation
Setting: Setup data C72
(DC current and voltage)
Square-root extraction
Setting: Setup data C07
(DC current and voltage)
Upper/lower limit value scaling
Setting: Setup data C04 to C06
(thermocouple and resistance temperature detector)
Temperature unit range
Upper/lower limit alarm
Linearization approximation
Bias
Setting: Setup data C02
Setting: Setup data C08
Table data T-A. 1 to T-B.B
Setting: Variable parameter PBi
Digital filter
Setting: Variable parameter FL
PV1
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
5-6 Output Processing Functions
Three outputs are provided as output processing functions: control output, SP output and auxiliary output.
I Control output
When the DCP301 is selected for use as a controller, control output is operational. How
outputs are processed varies according to the output type supported on the model.
I 5G output
Initialization of PID control
operation
Setting: Variable parameters 1 OUT/rpi d
Setting: PID parameters p/ 1 / d/8E
PID parameters dP/di /dd
PID parameters br
PID control operation
Output change limitter
Setting: Variable parameters OTL
Setting: Variable parameter AT
AT operation
AT execution
Setting: PID parameters OL/OH
Output upper/lower limit limitter
Setting: Setup data C 12/C 13
MV at over-range
Over-range
Setting: Setup data C 16
MV in READY mode
READY mode
Setting: Setup data C 14/C 15
Preset manual value
Manual MV
MANUAL mode
Manipulated variable (MV1)
Output 1
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
I 0D, 6D output
Initialization of PID control operation
PID control operation
Setting: Variable parameters 1 OUT/rpi d
Setting: PID parameters p/ 1 / d/RE
PID parameters dP/di /dd
PID parameters br
Output change limitter
Setting: Variable parameters OTL
Setting: PID parameters OL/OH
Output upper/lower limit limitter
ON/OFF control operation
ON/OFF control
Setting: Variable parameter DI FF
AT operation
Setting: Variable parameter AT
Setting: Setup data C 12/C 13
Setting: Setup data C 16
AT execution
Over-range
MV at over-range
MV in READY mode
READY mode
Preset manual value
Manual MV
Setting: Setup data C 14/C 15
Handling Precautions
In ON-OFF control, the DCP301
cannot be set to the MANUAL
mode. (The DCP301 can be set to
the MANUAL mode as ON-OFF
control is not possible in the
READY mode.)
MANUAL mode
Manipulated variable (MV1)
Output 1 time-proportional output cycle
Setting: Variable parameter Cy. 1
(6D output)
Setting: Setup data C78
Voltage output 1 adjustment
Output 1
Time-proportional relay output
Time-proportional voltage output
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
I 2G output
Initialization of PID control operation
Setting: Variable parameters 1 OUT/rpi d
PID control operation
Output change limitter
Setting: PID parameters p/ 1 / d/RE
PID parameters dP/di /dd
PID parameters br
Setting: Variable parameters OTL
Setting: Variable parameter AT
AT operation
AT execution
Output upper/lower limit limitter
Setting: PID parameters OL/OH
MV at over-range
Setting: Setup data C 12/C 13
Setting: Setup data C 16
Over-range
MV in READY mode
READY mode
Preset manual value
Setting: Setup data C 14/C 15
Manual MV
MANUAL mode
MFB automatic adjustment
MFB automatic
Setting: Variable parameter M.-AT
adjustment execution
Manipulated variable (MV1)
Motor control method selection
MFB operation
Setting: Variable parameter M.-C
Setting: Variable parameters M.-CL/M.-OP/M.-T
Motor control operation
Setting: Variable parameter DI FF
Output 1
open-side relay
Output 1
closed-side relay
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
I 3D, 5K outputs
Initialization of PID control operation
PID control operation
Setting: Variable parameters 1 OUT/rpi d
Setting: PID parameters p/ 1 / d/RE
Output change limitter
Setting: Variable parameters OTL
MV at over-range
Setting: Setup data C 12/C 13
Over-range
50%
READY mode
Setting: Setup data C 14/C 15
Preset manual value
Handling Precautions
Manual MV
In 3-position control, the DCP301 cannot be set to the
MANUAL mode
MANUAL mode
Manipulated variable (MV1)
Heat-cool MV operation
Setting: Variable parameter DI FF
Heat-side
Output upper/lower limit limitter
Cool-side
Output upper/lower limit limitter
Setting: PID parameters OL/OH
Setting: PID parameters OL/OH
(even-numbered PID sets)
(odd-numbered PID sets)
3-position control operation
3-position control operation
Setting: Setup data
C45
Setting: Setup data
C45
3-position control
3-position control
Variable parameters
Dv-L/HY-L
Variable parameters
Dv-H/HY-H
MV in READY mode (heat)
MV in READY mode (cool)
READY/AUTO modes Setting: Setup data C 1 7
Setting: Setup data C 16
READY/AUTO modes
MV (heat)
MV (cool)
Output 1 time-proportional output cycle
Output 2 time-proportional output cycle
(relay/voltage output)
(relay/voltage output)
Setting: Variable parameter CY.2
Setting: Variable parameter CY. 1
Voltage output 1 adjustment
Voltage output 2 adjustment
(voltage output)
(voltage output)
Setting: Setup data C78
Setting: Setup data C79
Output 2
Time-proportional relay output
Output 1
Time-proportional relay output
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)
Time-proportional voltage output
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)
Time-proportional voltage output
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5. FUNCTIONS
I SP output
When the DCP301 is selected for use as a programmer, control output is operational. On
5G output models, SP output is processed is as follows.
Main output types
Setting: Setup data C 18
Upper/lower limit scaling
Setting: Setup data C 19/C20
Setting: Setup data C 16
MV in READY mode
READY mode
Manual SP1
Upper/lower limit scaling
Setting: Setup data C 19/C20
MANUAL mode
SP1 output
Output 1
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)
I Auxiliary output
I Auxiliary output 1
When auxiliary output 1 or 2 are supported on 0D, 5G or 6D output models, auxiliary
output 1 is processed as follows.
Auxiliary output 1 type
Setting: Setup data C46
Upper/lower limit scaling
Setting: Setup data C47/C48
When READY mode is entered at auxiliary output
type SP and deviation
4mA (0mA)
When auxiliary output type is NOP
When auxiliary output type is set to MFB on non-
2G output models
When auxiliary output type is set to MV by program-
mer function on 5G output models
Output 2
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)
I Auxiliary output 2
When auxiliary output 2 is supported on 0D, 5G or 6D output models, auxiliary output 2
is processed as follows.
When auxiliary output 1 is supported on 2G, 3D or 5K output models, auxiliary output 2
is processed as follows.
Auxiliary output 2 type
Setting: Setup data C49
Setting: Setup data C50/C51
Upper/lower limit scaling
When READY mode is entered at auxiliary output
type SP and deviation
4mA (0mA)
When auxiliary output type is NOP
When auxiliary output type is set to MFB on non-2G
output models
When auxiliary output type is set to MV by program-
mer function on 5G output models
When auxiliary output type is set to MV by 3-position-
proportional control on 3D output models
Output 3
Current output 4 to 20mA (0 to 20mA)
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6-1 Turning the Power ON
The DCP301 is not equipped with a power switch or protective fuses. If necessary, prepare these externally.
When a voltage of 90 to 264Vac is applied across terminals (1) and (2) on the DCP301, display appears for about 10s
after which control and other operations are started. During controller startup until start of operations, the LEDs on
the profile display light successively at uneven intervals clockwise from top right. The following diagram shows the
flow of operations at startup.
G Startup flow
Power ON
NO
RAM backup normal?
YES
Check start of general reset
ENT
Press
key.
Continuation of program operation/constant-value oper-
ation modes
Parameter=factory shipment setting
Delete entire program.
Program operation mode
READY mode
Continuation of READY/RUN/HOLD/FAST/END modes
Continuation of AUTO/MANUAL modes
(Continuation of manual value if in MANUAL mode)
Continuation of program No./segment No.
Continuation of segment progress time
AUTO mode
Program No.1=1/segment No.=1
Segment progress time=0
Continuation of display No. of basic display state in
AUTO mode
Cancellation of auto-tuning/smart-tuning
Cancellation of MFB automatic adjustment by 2G output
Initialization of G.Soak standby time
Initialization of PID operation
Initialization of event output state
Setting display state → Basic display state
Display No. of basic display state in MANUAL mode
Start of operations
Handling Precautions
With the following modes and items, the state when the power is turned OFF
continues when the power is turned back ON.
• READY, RUN, HOLD, FAST, END modes
• AUTO, MANUAL modes
• MANUAL values in MANUAL mode
• Program No., segment No.
• Progress time in segment
• Display No. if in basic display state in AUTO mode
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6-2 Switching the Basic Display
The “basic display state” of the controller collectively refers to the display state of the program No. display, segment
No. display, upper display, lower display, basic indicator LED lamps and event LEDs.
DISP
Each press of
successively switches the basic display state. Operation of other displays and LEDs is carried out
DISP
in the same way even when setting up parameters, for example. However, switching by
is not possible.
The following figure shows the conventions used for displays in this manual.
Program/segment No. Display
In the program operation mode,
READY indicates the currently selected program/segment No.
Displays other than READY indicate the currently operating program/seg-
ment No.
In the constant-value operation mode, nothing is displayed and this dis-
play is blank.
Basic indicator LED lamps
: LED lit
: LED blinking
PV
Program No. Segment No.
PV
SP
Upper display
Lower display
SP
Pattern
tendency
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5
Event LEDs
Supplementary explanation
Profile Display
In the program operation mode, the profile is displayed only when the program has been set up.
The profile is not displayed when the program is not set up.
When there is no subsequent segment even if the program is set up, the three LEDs on the right do
not light. In the constant-value operation mode, nothing is displayed and this display is blank.
(1)
(4)
Falling ramp
Rising ramp
Current segment
(2) Soak
(5) Soak
Next segment
(6)
(3) Rising ramp
Falling ramp
PROFILE
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
G Display in program operation mode
DISP
G
functions
Output Model No.
Display
0D, 5G, 6D
Display 1 → Display 2 → Display 5 → Display 6 → Display 7 →
Display 1 (repeated)
2G
Display 1 → Display 2 → Display 3 → Display 5 → Display 6 →
Display 7 → Display 1 (repeated)
3D, 5K
Display 1 → Display 2 → Display 4 → Display 5 → Display 6 →
Display 7 → Display 1 (repeated)
G Display 1
PV
Program No. Segment No.
PV
SP
SP
Pattern
tendency
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5
The digit to which SP values can be entered blinks in the MANUAL mode when pro-
grammer functions are selected.
G Display 2
PV
Program No. Segment No.
PV
OUT
Pattern
tendency
Output value (%)
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5
The digit to which SP values can be entered blinks in the MANUAL mode when control-
ler functions are selected.
G Display 3
Program No. Segment No.
F B
Pattern
tendency
Motor valve opening (%)
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5
This display is exclusive to 2G output models (output catalog No. appended with 2G).
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
G Display 4
Program No. Segment No.
Heat-side output (%)
Cool-side output (%)
OUT
Pattern
tendency
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5
This display is exclusive to heat/cool output models (output catalog No. appended with
3D or 5K).
G Display 5
PV
Program No. Segment No.
PV
TM
Pattern
tendency
Time
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5
Either of “h:min” or “min:s” is selected as the time unit in setup settings. Select either
“remaining segment time” or “total operating time” in setup settings as the details whose
time is to be displayed.
G Display 6
PV
Program No. Segment No.
PV
CYC
Pattern
tendency
Number of remaining cycles
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5
When the remaining number of cycles is “0”, subsequent cycle operation is not carried
out.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
G Display 7
Program No. Segment No.
SP
SP
TM
Pattern
tendency
Time
Output states of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5
The digit to which SP values can be entered blinks in the MANUAL mode when pro-
grammer functions are selected. Either of “h:min” or “min:s” is selected as the time unit
in setup settings. Select either “remaining segment time” or “total operating time” in
setup settings as the details whose time is to be displayed.
G Display in constant-value operation mode
DISP
G
functions
Output Model No.
Display
0D, 5G, 6D
2G
Display 1 → Display 2 → Display 1 (repeated)
Display 1 → Display 2 → Display 3 → Display 1 (repeated)
Display 1 → Display 2 → Display 4 → Display 1 (repeated)
3D, 5K
G Display 1
PV
PV
SP
SP
Output state of events 1 to 3
The digit to which SP values can be entered blinks in the MANUAL mode when control-
ler functions are selected.
G Display 2
PV
PV
OUT
Output value (%)
Output state of events 1 to 3
The digit to which SP values can be entered blinks in the MANUAL mode when pro-
grammer functions are selected.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
G Display 3
F B
Motor valve opening (%)
Output state of events 1 to 3
This display is exclusive to 2G output models (output catalog No. appended with 2G).
G Display 4
Heat-side output (%)
OUT
Cool-side output (%)
Output state of events 1 to 3
This display is exclusive to heat/cool output models (output catalog No. appended with
3D or 5K).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6-3 Program Selection
The program No. can be selected on the console within the range 1 to 19.
G How to select the program No.
When the controller is in the basic display state in the
program operation READY mode:
Program No.1
PROG
• Each press of
increments the program No. The
PROG
display reverts to 1 after 19.
key
key
key
• Each press of
decrements the program No. The
Program No.2
display reverts to 19 after 1.
PROG
key
Program No.3
Program No.4
PROG
key
key
Handling Precautions
• Both already set or non-set program Nos. can be selected
• The program No. cannot be selected when selecting the program No. by exter-
nal switch input.
• The program No. cannot be selected during constant-value operation.
• Pressing
does not change the program No. when values currently being
entered are displayed in the MANUAL mode.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6-4 External Switch (RSW) Operations
G External switch (RSW) inputs
In all, the DCP301 is provided with 12 external switch inputs. Each of these inputs are
differentiated by RSW1, RSW2 and so forth to RSW12. On models whose option 2 cata-
log No. is “0”, only inputs RSW1 to RSW4 are mounted.
(RSW: external switch input)
G External switch input types
The functions of RSW1 to 4, and RSW8 to 12 are fixed.
The functions of RSW5 to 7 are selected by the setup setting.
External
Function
Detection Method
Switch No.
RSW1
RSW2
RSW3
RSW4
RUN
Rising edge
Rising edge
Rising edge
Rising edge
HOLD
RESET
ADV
Selected by setup from the following functions
FAST
RSW5
RSW6
RSW7
Rising edge
Rising edge
Rising/falling edge
Rising/falling edge
Status
PV start
AUTO/MANUAL
AT start/stop
G.Soak cancel by OR conditions
G.Soak cancel by AND conditions
Direct/reverse action switching
Status
Status
RSW8
Program No. selection
Program No. selection
Program No. selection
Program No. selection
Program No. selection
Weighting 1
Weighting 2
Weighting 4
Weighting 8
Weighting 10
Status
RSW9
Status
RSW10
RSW11
RSW12
Status
Status
Status
• With PV is valid only in the program operation mode and READY mode, and the PV
start RUN mode is entered regardless of the PV start setting in the program.
Note, however, that RUN mode is entered from the start point of the selected segment
in READY mode when there is no SP for the PV start.
• With G.Soak cancel by OR conditions, G.Soak standby is canceled when the external
switch turns ON or when the PV enters the G.Soak width.
• With G.Soak cancel by AND conditions, G.Soak standby is canceled when the exter-
nal switch turns ON or when the PV enters the G.Soak width.
• When the external switch turns ON by direct/reverse action switching, control opera-
tion is the opposite to that set in setup parameter C 0 1. When the external switch
turned OFF, control operation is that set in setup parameter C 0 1.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
G Program selection
The program can be selected in the program operation READY mode. The table below
shows program selection by external switch inputs. Two external switch states are pro-
vided for selection of programs 10 to 15. When program selection by external switch
inputs is set to “0”, the program can be selected by the console keys and by communica-
tion with a personal computer.
External
Weighting
State
Switch No.
RSW8
RSW9
RSW10
RSW11
RSW12
1
2
4
8
10
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Program No. Selection
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
External
Weighting
State
Switch No.
RSW8
RSW9
RSW10
RSW11
RSW12
1
2
4
8
10
OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Program No. Selection
10
11
12
13
14
15
External
Weighting
State
Switch No.
RSW8
RSW9
RSW10
RSW11
RSW12
1
2
4
8
10
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
Program No. Selection
16 17 18 19
0
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
G Read timing
G Timing of RSW1 to 7
Inputs RSW1 to RSW7 are read according to the following timing.
(1) When input changes state from OFF to ON, the time from the change up to reading is
0.2s max.
(2) When input changes state from ON to OFF, the time from the change up to reading is
0.2s max.
ON read
OFF read
External switch input state
(1)
(2)
G Timing of RSW8 to 12, RUN and PV start
The time from the change in input state up to reading when selecting program Nos. by
RSW8 to RSW12 is 0.4s max.
Accordingly, due to the relationship with RUN operation, be sure to observe timings G
to (4) in the following diagram.
PV start operation also must conform to RUN operation.
(1) The time from fixing of the selected No. up to the rising edge of the RUN signal is
0.4s min.
(2) The time from the rising edge of the RUN signal up to holding of the program No. is
0.2s min.
(3) The time from holding of RUN signal OFF up to the rising edge of the RUN signal is
0.2s min.
(4) The time from the rising edge of the RUN signal up to holding of RUN signal ON is
0.2s min.
(5) The time from fixing of the selected No. up to changing of the program No. is 0.4s
max.
(6) The time from the rising edge of the RUN signal up to start of RUN is 0.4s max.
Program selection No.
(5 inputs)
State of
selected No.
State of No. di
from that selec
State of No. different
from that selected
(1)
(2)
RUN signal
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
Program No.
No. different from that selected
Selected No.
Handling Precautions
When operating the controller by external switch inputs, operation can be carried
out more reliably if a margin is added to the minimum time for the above read
times.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
6-5 Manual Operation and Auto-tuning
G Manual operation
In the MANUAL mode, controller outputs can be manipulated by
sole.
or
on the con-
G Controller functions
When outputs are displayed in the basic display state, only one digit in the output value
blinks. If the output value is incremented or decremented by or , actual output
also increments or decrements. Output values differ from values being entered to setting
ENT
items in that
need not be pressed.
The blinking digit can be moved by pressing
or
.
On 2G output models, when only estimated position-proportional control is selected by
variable parameter M .-C setting 2, “——” not the value is displayed as the output dis-
play in the MANUAL mode.
Pressing
Pressing
displays “O p e n” , and the open-side relay turns ON.
displays “C l O S” , and the closed-side relay turns ON.
Bump-less and preset output changes when shifting from the AUTO to the MANUAL
mode can be selected by setup parameter C 15 setting. When shifting from the MANUAL
to the AUTO mode, output is bumpless.
(However, when the total time for the PID parameter of the PID set in use is set to “0”, a
sudden change in output occurs.)
G Programmer functions
On 5G output models, when programmer functions are in operation with setup data C 18
setting 1, SP can be manually manipulated. When SP is displayed in the basic display
state, only one digit in the SP value being entered blinks. When the SP value is incremented
or decremented by
or
, the actual SP output also increments or decrements. SP
ENT
values differ from values being entered to setting items in that
need not be pressed.
The blinking digit can be moved by pressing or
.
Output changes when shifting from the AUTO to the MANUAL mode are bumpless
regardless of setup data C 15 setting. When shifting from the MANUAL to the AUTO
mode, the SP becomes the program pattern SP, which results in a sudden change in out-
put.
G Auto-tuning (AT)
When operating in the AUTO mode in either of the RUN, HOLD, FAST or END modes,
setting values can be automatically written to the PID set in use by auto-tuning (AT). The
following can be selected by variable parameter A t setting.
0:AT is disabled.
1:General AT is executed.
2:Overshoot-inhibited AT is executed.
3:AT by neural net is executed.
• Auto-tuning does not function when programmer functions are selected on 3D or 5K
heat/cool output models and 5G output models.
• During execution of auto-tuning, progress of program operation time stops. Accord-
ingly, the controller is in a similar state to the HOLD mode even in the RUN or FAST
modes.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6. OPERATION
• Auto-tuning in all instances involves calculating the downtime and critical sensitivity
of the line according to two limit cycles and PID values according to suitable charac-
teristic equations for each, and automatically writing these PID values.
• During execution of auto-tuning, PV fluctuates according to fluctuations in MV. Be-
fore executing auto-tuning, make sure that fluctuations in PV will not cause controller
trouble.
• Normally, suitable values are written by setting variable parameter At setting to 1 or 3.
However, when executing auto-tuning on a line that easily overshoots, either set to 2,
or also use smart-tuning for carrying out overshoot inhibit control. Setting to 3 ex-
ecutes AT by neural net so that the suitable value is calculated for wider range applica-
tions.
• The point at which output at auto-tuning is inverted (lower limit to upper limit, and
vice versa) is determined as follows from SP and PV at start of auto-tuning.
At start
At SP=PV operation
PV
PV
SP
PV>SP
2/3
1/3
1/3
SP
2/3
PV<SP
Time
Time
AT start
Normal end
AT start
Normal end
AT
• Auto-tuning can be started by
, external switch inputs and communications. Dur-
ing auto-tuning, the AT LED blinks.
• If one or more of the following conditions occurs during auto-tuning, auto-tuning is
canceled without PID constants being written, and the AT LED goes out.
AT
- Cancel by
- Cancel by external switch input
- Cancel by communications
- Change in mode (shift to MANUAL mode or READY mode)
- Execution of automatic motor valve opening adjustment on 2G output models
- When variable parameter A t setting is changed to “0”
- When input 1 becomes out-of-range
Handling Precautions
• Auto-tuning will not function properly unless the control target is connected.
• The time from start to end of auto-tuning varies according to the control target.
• When auto-tuning is executed, control is stopped, OFF and ON outputs are
switched in the case of relay output and voltage output, and the manipulated
variable upper and lower limits of the currently selected PID set are switched
several times in the case of current output and position proportional output. If
this causes controller trouble, manually set the PID value.
• Sometimes a suitable PID value cannot be obtained depending on the control
target. If this happens, manually set the PID value.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
7-1 Parameter Setup
Parameters can be set up when the DCP301 is in the basic display state.
DISP
If the DCP301 is not in the basic display state, press
to set the controller to the basic display state.
■ Selecting the setting group in the parameter setup
Parameter setup is divided into two stages: setting group (major item) and individual
item (minor item).
FUNC
PARA
If you press
+
in the basic display state, the display changes to selection of
setting group (major item), the setting group is displayed on the upper display, and the
lower display goes out.
PARA
If you press
,
or
, the setting group display changes in order.
Basic Display State
DISP
FUNC
PARA
key
+
keys
ENT
key
key
Setting group 1 (major items) selection
Individual items
PARA
PARA
,
,
,
,
key
key
key
key
key
ENT
key
key
Setting group 2 (major items) selection
Individual items
PARA
,
,
PARA
key
key
key
ENT
key
key
Setting group n (major items) selection
Individual items
PARA
PARA
,
,
,
key
key
key
key
ENT
If you press
when the setup group to be selected is displayed, the display moves to
the individual (minor) item level.
The following table shows the setting groups.
Upper
Display
Name
Remarks
Variable param-
eters
P A R A
Event configuration
data
This parameter is not displayed when variable parameter L O C is 2 or 4
E V
PID parameters
This parameter is not displayed when variable parameter L O C is 2 or 4
This parameter is not displayed when constant-value operation data
M .O D E is 1
P 1 D
This parameter is not displayed when setup data C 1 8 is 1 by 5G output
This parameter is not displayed when setup data C 4 5 is 1 by 3D output
Setup data
Table data
This parameter is not displayed when variable parameter L O C is 1, 2 or 4
This parameter is not displayed when variable parameter L O C is 2 or 4
This parameter is not displayed when variable parameter L O C is 2 or 4
S E T
T B L
Constant-value
operation data
C N S T
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Moving individual items in the parameter setup
With individual items, item codes are displayed in the upper display and setting values
are displayed in the lower display.
The program No. display goes out, and the item No. is displayed in the segment No.
display. However, note that the segment No. display also goes out in the case of setup
data.
Individual items are arranged in a matrix as shown on the following page, and can be
displayed in order by pressing
,
,
or
. The size of individual item matri-
ces varies according to the setting group.
■ Changing individual items and how to return from the setup state
ENT
If you press
when an individual item is displayed, the setting value blinks. This state
is referred to as the “setting value entry state.” In this state, pressing
crement or decrement the setting value that is blinking. Also, pressing
the position of the digit that is blinking.
or
or
can in-
moves
ENT
If you press
when the setting value is at the desired value, blinking stops, the display
returns to its normally lit state, and the new setting value is stored to internal memory.
PARA
PARA
DISP
To cancel changing of setting values, press
or
. When
is pressed, the value
stops blinking and the display returns to its normal lit state.
DISP
If you press
, the display returns to the basic display state. If “- - - -” is displayed at
the lower display when an individual item is displayed, or the controller does not enter
ENT
the setting value entry state by pressing
, that item cannot be set nor changed.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
• Example of individual item matrix (setup date)
C 0 0
C 9 1
C 9 2
C 9 3
C 0 1
C 0 2
C 0 3
C 1 1
C 1 2
C 1 3
C 8 1
C 8 2
C 8 3
C 9 1
C 9 2
C 9 3
C 0 1
C 0 2
C 0 3
C 9 9
C 0 0
C 0 9
C 1 9
C 2 0
C 8 9
C 9 0
C 9 9
C 0 0
C 0 1
C 0 9
C 1 0
C 1 0
DISP
key
Basic Display State
DISP
key
ENT
ENT
key,
key,
key
key
key
key
key
Setting group selection
(major items)
Individual items
(minor items)
Setting value
blinking
ENT
PARA
PARA
*
key
key,
Change setting value.
key
key
key
key
Individual items
(minor items)
key
key
key
key
ENT
*
stores setting values to memory.
PARA
does not store setting values to memory.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
PARA
7-2 How to Use
PARA
Use
for calling up individual items in frequently changed parameters.
■ How to register functions to keys
PARA
Up to eight individual items in the parameter setup can be assigned to each
assignment item must be registered to use this feature.
key. The
This feature allows you to call up individual items more easily in the following order:
FUNC
PARA
+
→ selection of setting group → individual item matrix.
■ How to register assignment items
To register an assignment item, add the following base corresponding to the setting group
PARA
to the item No., and then set the resultant value to setup data C 5 5 to C 6 2 (
assign-
ment items 1 to 8)).
Base
Setting Group
1000 Constant-value operation data
1500 PID parameters
2500 Variable parameters
3500 Event configuration data
4000 Table data
4500 Setup data
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Example
PARA
Let’s register four individual items to PARA . If you press
in the basic display state,
the 1st to 4th individual items in the table below are displayed successively. In this ex-
ample, let’s change the setting values.
PARA
Order
Item to Call by
Setup data
1
2
3
4
C 0 1
P -2
F L
PID parameter
Variable parameter
Variable parameter
F A S T
The settings for registering these individual items are as follows.
Setup Data Setting “S E t”
Item Code
No. [auxiliary
display]
Setting
Value
Item
Remarks
PARA
55
assignment
C 5 5
4501
This is produced by adding item No.1
item 1
of C 0 1 to setup data radical 4500.
PARA
C 5 6
56
assignment 1511
This is produced by adding item No.11
item 2
of P -2 to PID parameter radical 1500.
PARA
57 C 5 7
assignment 2503
This is produced by adding item No.3
item 3
of F L to setup data radical 2500.
PARA
58 C 5 8
assignment 2520
This is produced by adding item No.20
of F A S T to variable parameter
radical 2500.
item 4
Handling Precautions
• For details on item Nos., see 7-3 Parameter Setup List (pages 7-7 to 7-42).
PARA
• When the “
assignment item” setting is set to a value that does not corre-
spond to an existing item, that setting is ignored.
For example, though factory setting 1000 corresponds to “constant-value op-
eration data” 0th of base 1000, 0th does not exist, so the setting will be treated
an invalid data and will not be registered.
PARA
■ Operations by
PARA
If you press
Each press of
in the basic display state, registered individual items are called up.
successively calls up (up to eight) registered individual items. Only
PARA
individual items to which valid assignment settings have been registered can be called
up.
PARA
operations are not limited by the setting of “variable parameter setup” L O C (key
PARA
lock) setting.
operations are described on the following page.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
DISP
DISP
key
key
ENT
ENT
Display item by
Display item by
PARA
key
key
Basic Display
State
key
PARA
PARA
key assign-
key assign-
ment item 1
(normally lit)
ment item 1
(blinking)*
PARA
PARA
key
key
ENT
ENT
Display item by
key assign-
ment item 2
Display item by
DISP
key
key
PARA
PARA
key
key
key assign-
ment item 2
(normally lit)
(blinking)
*
PARA
PARA
key
key
ENT
ENT
Display item by
Display item by
DISP
key
key
PARA
PARA
Max. 8 items
key assign-
key assign-
ment item 3
ment item 3
(normally lit)
(blinking)*
PARA
PARA
key
key
ENT
ENT
Display item by
key assign-
ment item 8
Display item by
DISP
key
key
PARA
PARA
key
key assign-
ment item 8
(normally lit)
(blinking)*
PARA
PARA
key
key
Handling Precautions
When invalid assignments are registered, that item is
skipped and the next registered item is displayed.
* Items that can be changed: When these items are displayed blinking, the setting
values can be changed by
,
,
and
.
ENT
stores data to memory.
Items for reference:
These are displayed at all times.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
7-3 Parameter Setup List
“U” and “%FS” used in the “Factory Setting” and “Setting” columns in the table mean
the following:
Note
U:
The decimal point changes according to the input range type setting. For example,
when one digit past the decimal point is allowed, -1999U becomes 199.9, and
9999U becomes 999.9.
%FS: The numbers and decimal point position changes according to the input range setting.
For example, when the input range is 0.0 to 800.0°C, 0%FS is 0.0 and 100%FS is
800.0.
■ Variable parameter settings “P A R A”
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
0
1
L O C
Key lock
0: Key lock disabled
1: Display of setup data settings disabled
2: Display of parameter settings and program settings
disabled
3: Use of operation keys disabled
4: Display of parameter settings and program settings
displayed, and use of operation keys disabled
[Note]
Two or more key lock setting values for actual key lock
PARA
items and items assigned to
and set.
can be displayed
0
0: Changing program settings enabled
1: Changing program settings disabled
0.0 to 120.0s
Program protect
2
3
P R T C
F L
Input 1 digital filter
0.0
[Note]
0.0 disables the filter.
-1000 to 1000U
0U
0U
0.0
Input 1 bias
SP1 bias
4
5
6
P B 1
S B 1
O T L
-1999 to 9999U
0.0 to 10.0% (0.1%s steps)
[Note]
MV change limitter
(CH1)
0.0 disables the limit.
PID operation initial
MV (CH1)
0.0 to 100%
[Note]
7
8
1 O U T
R P 1 D
0.0
(50.0)
On heat/cool models, the factory setting is 50.0.
0: Automatic judgment of initialization is carried out by
advance operation.
PID operation
initialization
0
1: Initialization is carried out by advance operation.
2: Initialization is not carried out by advance operation.
0: AT is disabled.
Auto-tuning method
selection (CH1)
9
A T
0
1: General AT is executed.
2: Overshoot-inhibited AT is executed.
3: AT by neural net is executed.
[Note]
On heat/cool models, “– – – –” is displayed, and
setting is not possible.
Smart-tuning
10 S T
0: Smart-tuning is disabled.
0
0
method selection
1: The brake value is fixed to inhibit overshoot.
2: Overshoot is inhibited while automatically reviewing
the brake value.
(CH1)
[Note]
On heat/cool models, “– – – –” is displayed, and
setting is not possible.
0: 2 degrees of freedom PID is disabled.
1: 2 degrees of freedom PID is enabled.
[Note]
11 2 P 1 D
Advanced PID
selection (CH1)
On heat/cool models, “– – – –” is displayed, and
setting is not possible.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
12 G 5 .T
13 C P . 1 1
2.0
0U
0.1 to 60.0s
-1999 to 9999U
[Note]
G.Soak time (CH1)
PID auto-switching
point 1-1
14 C P . 1 2
15 C P . 1 3
16 C P . 1 4
17 C P . 1 5
18 C P . 1 6
19 C P . 1 7
20 F A S T
200U
400U
600U
800U
1000U
1200U
0
When setup data C 1 1 setting is 0 (PID set auto-
switching OFF), “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not
possible.
PID auto-switching
point 1-2
PID auto-switching
point 1-3
PID auto-switching
point 1-4
-1999 to 9999U
[Note]
PID auto-switching
point 1-5
On heat/cool models, “– – – –” is displayed and setting
is not possible.
PID auto-switching
point 1-6
On other models, when setup data C 1 1 setting is 0
(PID set auto-switching OFF), “– – – –” is displayed
and setting is not possible.
PID auto-switching
point 1-7
FAST factor
0: 2X
1: 10X
2: 60X (10X)
3: 120X (10X)
[Note]
When setup data C 6 4 setting is 1 (program time
unit:min/s), the FAST factor is 10X for settings 2 and 3.
21 D 1 F F
ON-OFF control
differential
5U
5.0
0.0
0 to 1000U
[Note]
This setting is displayed on 0D and 6D models.
Position-propor-
tional dead zone
0.5 to 25.0%
[Note]
This setting is displayed on 2G output models.
Heat/cool control
dead zone
-100.0 to 50.0%
[Note]
This setting is displayed on heat/cool models.
[Note]
On 5G output models, “– – – –” is displayed and
setting is not possible.
Output 1 time-
proportional output
cycle
5 to 120s (relay output)
22 C Y . 1
10
10
1 to 60s (voltage output)
[Note]
On models whose output 1 is neither relay output nor
voltage output, “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not
possible.
Output 2 time-
proportional output
cycle
5 to 120s (relay output)
23 C Y . 2
1 to 60s (voltage output)
[Note]
On models whose output 2 is neither relay output nor
voltage output, “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not
possible.
Unused
[Note]
24 C Y . 3
25 D V -L
26 D V -H
27 H Y -L
–
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
0 to 1000U
3-position control
deviation lower limit
3-position control
deviation upper limit
3-position control
lower limit hyster-
esis
5U
5U
5U
[Note]
On models other than 3D output models, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
3-position control
upper limit hyster-
esis
28 H Y -H
5U
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
29 M .-C
0
0: MFB control (conventional) + estimated position
control
Motor control
method selection
1: MFB control (conventional) only
2: Estimated position control only
[Note]
On models other than 2G output models, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
0: Adjustment disabled
30 M .-A T
0
Motor valve opening
automatic adjust-
ment
1: Adjustment enabled
[Note]
On models other than 2G output models, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
On 2G output models, when M .-C setting is 2, “– – – –
” is displayed and setting is not possible.
0 to (fully open adjustment - 500)
[Note]
31 M .-C L
32 M .-O P
33 M .-T
Motor valve opening 1000
adjustment fully
closed position
On models other than 2G output models, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
On 2G output models, when M .-C setting is 2, “– – – –
” is displayed and setting is not possible.
(fully closed adjustment + 500) to 9999
[Note]
Motor valve opening
adjustment fully
open position
9000
30.0
On models other than 2G output models, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
On 2G output models, when M .-C setting is 2, “– – – –
” is displayed and setting is not possible.
5.0 to 240.0s
Motor valve opening
adjustment fully
[Note]
open/closed time
On models other than 2G output models, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Description of variable parameter settings
■ L O C (key lock)
0: Key lock disabled
1: Display of setup data settings disabled
2: Display of parameter settings and program settings disabled
3: Use of operation keys disabled
4: Display of parameter settings and program settings displayed, and use of operation
keys disabled
• When L O C is set to 1, the following keys are disabled.
FUNC
CLR
DISP
Basic display state:
+
+
(general reset)
Only S E T can be selected by setting group selection in the parameter setup state.
• When L O C is set to 2, the following keys are disabled.
FUNC
PROG
Basic display state:
+
+
+
(program setup)
(program copy)
(general reset)
PROG
CLR
FUNC
DISP
+
Only P A R A can be selected by setting group selection in the parameter setup state.
PARA
PARA
However, note that items assigned to
play state.
can be called up by
in the basic dis-
• When L O C is set to 3, the following keys are disabled.
PROG
Basic display state:
(program selection)
(program selection)
RUN/HOLD
PROG
(RUN, HOLD)
(RESET)
RUN/HOLD
DISP
+
+
+
PROG
FUNC
(ADV)
(FAST)
A/M
AT
(AUTO, MANUAL)
(AT start, AT cancel)
(general reset)
FUNC
CLR
DISP
+
+
However, note that MV (when controller functions are selected) and SP (when pro-
grammer functions are selected) can be changed in the basic display state in the
MANUAL mode.
• When L O C is set to 4, all keys disabled when L O C is set to 2 and 3 are disabled.
■ P R T C (program protect)
0: Changing program settings enabled
1: Changing program settings disabled
When P R T C is set to 1, the following keys are disabled.
PROG
Basic display state:
+
+
(program copy)
FUNC
ENT
CLR
ENT
DISP
+
(general reset)
Program setup state:
(start of value entry)
(segment insert/delete)
FUNC
+
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ O T L (MV change limit)
The MV is increased or decreased by the same value so that the output change is taken as
the limit setting value when the output change (%) after PID operation is greater than this
limit setting.
The following example shows the actual change in MV when the MV changes from 20%
to 22% with the change limit setting at 0.5%. MV is output at 0.5% setting value incre-
ments every 0.1s, and reaches 22% in 0.4s.
%
22
21
20
s
t
t + 0.1 t + 0.2 t + 0.3 t + 0.4
■ I O U t (PID operation initial MV)
PID operation is started in the following cases using the I O U t setting value:
• When the mode changes from READY AUTO to RUN AUTO
• When the power is turned ON in the RUN AUTO (or HOLD, FAST, END AUTO)
mode
• At completion of auto-tuning
As the PV, SP and PID parameters settings bear a relation to PID operation, the first MV
resulting from PID operation will not necessarily match the I O U t setting value.
■ R P I D (PID operation initialization)
When SP changes suddenly by ADV (advance) operation, rate action in PID operation
may cause the MV in the operation to change excessively. For this reason, excessive
changes can be suppressed by initializing PID operation.
However, as initialization of PID operation may result in lost continuity, initialization
may adversely influence PID operation depending on the circumstances in which the
controller is being used.
Initialization ON/OFF and conditions can be selected by the R P I D setting.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ S t (smart-tuning method selection)
0: Smart-tuning is disabled.
1: The brake value is fixed to inhibit overshoot.
2: Overshoot is inhibited while automatically reviewing the brake value.
• When the control direction is set to reverse action, overshoot is inhibited. When set to
direct action, undershoot is inhibited. Both functions are referred to collectively as
“overshoot inhibit.”
When set to 1, the value of PID parameter setting item B R is used as it is to inhibit
overshoot.
When set to 2, the value of B R is reviewed at each rise (reverse action) or fall (direct
action, and overshoot is inhibited while the value is automatically rewritten.
Review is executed only in the direction in which the B R value is increased (overshoot
inhibit effect becomes more apparent).
When operation is carried out for a long time with this parameter set to 2, overshoot
inhibit may function too strongly, and it may take a long time to arrive at SP. So, when
overshoot disappears, note down the B R value at that time, set S T to 1, and reset the
B R value to the noted down value.
• The AT LED lights while reviewing the B R value when set to 2.
• Do not set to 2 when normal control is not being carried out due to inappropriate tuning
of the PID constant, for example.
Also, hunting is more likely to occur when B R is set to a large value on quick-starting
lines. Set the B R value to 0 then to 2.
• On heat/cool models, smart-tuning does not function.
■ 2 P I D (2 degrees of freedom)
0: 2 degrees of freedom is disabled.
1: 2 degrees of freedom is enabled.
• 2 degrees of freedom is a function for improving the response to disturbance during
setup without losing conventional characteristics at rise (or fall).
When set to 1, optimum PID constants can be set individually for inhibiting distur-
bance in addition to conventional the PID constant.
These constants are set automatically during AT execution, and is memorized. They
can also be set and changed independently.
In particular, on 2G output models, suppressing changes in MV to lessen the frequency
of motor operation during setup, and manually applying weak PID differential for in-
hibiting disturbance to lengthen service life, for example, proves effective.
• These PID are switched automatically by applying fuzzy rules on the slope between
deviation and PV.
• When I (reset time) is set to 0, control is carried out without integration in all states
regardless of the setting value of D I (disturbance inhibit reset time).
• On heat/cool models, 2 degrees of freedom does not function.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ D I F F
• ON-OFF control differential
When P is set to 0.0 on both 0D and 6D output models, control is set to ON-OFF control,
and operational period at that time is set.
Reverse action
Direct action
ON
OFF
PV
ON
OFF
PV
Differential
gap
Differential
gap
SP
SP
• Position-proportional control dead zone
On 2G output models, a dead zone between the motor open and motor closed positions is
set.
As a general guideline, the minimum value is the value where this dead zone changes to
stop motor hunting once a fixed value set to manual output is being output.
If this value is set without any margin, the motor will be operating at all times, which will
considerably shorten its service life.
The factory setting is 5%. Use this as a guideline, and take the control results and motor
service life into consideration when setting the dead zone.
*: Dead zone setting value
Dead zone
Closed-side
relay ON
Open-side
relay ON
Control output (%)
*
*
MFB (%)
• Heat/cool control dead zone
On heat/cool models, this sets how the relationship between heat-side output and cool-
side output should be processed with respect to the MV resulting from PID operation.
Heat-cool control is calculated as follows:
Note 4)
PID set selection
(1 of 4 sets)
Heat-side
PID set
Cool-side
PID set
Note 3)
Note 2)
Heat-side PID set
Constants OL, OH
Cool-side PID set
Constants OL, OH
Constants P, I, D, Re
PV
SP
Heat-side
output
PID operation
(fixed to reverse action)
Heat-cool output calculation
MV
(PID operation result)
Cool-side
output
Note 1)
Dead zone
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
Note 1) On heat/cool models, this sets how the relationship between heat-side output
and cool-side output should be processed with respect to the MV resulting from
PID operation.
Dead zone<0
Dead zone=0
100%
100%
Dead
zone
Control output
values
Output
(cool)
Output
(heat)
Output
(cool)
Output
(heat)
0%
0%
MV
MV
50%
100%
50%
100%
Dead zone>0
100%
Dead
zone
Output
(cool)
Output
(heat)
0%
MV
50%
100%
Note 2) Constants OL and OH function as follows:
100%
Cool-side
output
Heat-side
output
Cool-side OH
Heat-side OH
Cool-side OL
MV
Heat-side OL
0%
50%
100%
Note 3) When MV ≥ 50%, the heat-side PID set is switched to.
When MV < 50%, the cool-side PID set is switched to.
Note 4) PID set selection is carried out by setting value and external switch.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ D v -L (3-position control deviation lower limit)
■ D v -H (3-position control deviation upper limit)
■ H Y -L (3-position control lower limit hysteresis)
■ H Y -H (3-position control upper limit hysteresis)
In 3-position control, control is carried out in the following three states in the RUN,
HOLD, FAST and END modes.
State
Heat-side Output Cool-side Output
MV
1
2
3
OFF (0.0%)
OFF (0.0%)
ON (100.0%)
ON (100.0%)
OFF (0.0%)
OFF (0.0%)
0.0%
50.0%
100.0%
Output (heat)
Output (cool)
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
PV
HY-L
DV-L
DV-H
HY-H
SP
Handling Precautions
Even in 3-position control, output is time-proportional in the READY mode. This
is set in setup data C 1 6 (MV (heat) in READY mode) and C 1 7 (MV (cool) in
READY mode).
When connecting an actuator that may burn by time-proportional output, set setup
data C 1 6 and C 1 7 so that output in the READY mode is 0%.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ M .-C (motor control method selection)
0: MFB control (conventional) + estimated position control
1: MFB control (conventional) only
2: Estimated position control only
• 0: MFB control (conventional) + estimated position control
• When MFB (Motor Feed Back) input is normal, the motor position is controlled by the
actually measured MFB.
• When MFB input is in error, the motor position is controlled by an estimated MFB
value. This state is referred to as “estimated position control state.”
For example, when the motor rotates at a position where the feedback potentiometer
has deteriorated, MFB input changes suddenly. This sudden change is detected as an
error, and the correct MFB position is estimated. The motor position is also controlled
by the estimated MFB value when the MFB disconnected alarm has occurred.
• In the estimated position control state, an error will inevitably occur between the actual
motor valve opening and estimated MFB value.
So, set the closed-side relay to ON at all times when output (MV) ≤ 0.0%, and the
open-side relay to ON at all times when MV ≥ 100.0% to set the motor to a fully-open
or fully-closed state to compensate this error.
However, note that this error is not compensated when MV is limited to within 0.1 to
99.9% by the output limitter, or when MV is 0.0% or less or 100% or more due to the
control state.
• The following are probable causes when estimated position control is likely to be car-
ried out:
- Defective motor valve opening adjustment
- Deteriorated feedback potentiometer, insufficient resolution
- Defective MFB wiring.
• 1: MFB control (conventional) only
• When this setting is used, conventional MFB control is carried out. When the MFB
disconnected alarm occurs, the MFB value is regarded as 150.0%, and the closed-side
relay is ON at all times.
• 2: Estimated position control only
• When this setting is used, control is in the estimated position control state at all times,
and the motor position is controlled by the estimated MFB value regardless of the state
of MFB wiring.
• When this setting is used, enter the correct M .-t item.
• The MFB disconnected alarm does not occur.
• The error between actual motor valve opening and estimated MFB value is compen-
sated by forcibly continuing motor operation in the closed or open directions when MV
is 0.0% and 100%.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ M .-A t (motor valve opening automatic adjustment)
0: Adjustment disabled
1: Adjustment enabled
This parameter automatically measures the motor fully closed position, fully open posi-
tion, and close-open times. The results of calculation are automatically written to M .-C L,
M .-O P and M .-t.
• Adjustment Method and Motor Functions
1. Set M .-C to 0 or 1.
ENT
2. Set M .-A t to 1, and press
.
ENT
If set to 1 already, press
twice to enter automatic adjustment.
3. Automatic adjustment is carried out.
- C A .C L is displayed on the upper display, and the closed-side relay turns ON.
- The motor operates to the closed side, and the MFB count value is displayed on
the lower display. When the count has stabilized, fully closed adjustment is com-
pleted, and the count value is written to M .-C L.
- C A .O P is displayed on the upper display, and the closed-side relay turns ON.
- The motor operates to the open side, and the MFB count value is displayed on the
lower display. When the count has stabilized, fully open adjustment is completed,
and the count value is written to M .-O P.
The time it took from fully closed to fully open is written to M .-t. However, note
that if this time is 240.0s or more, the time is taken as 240.0s.
- When all adjustments are completed, the controller returns to the basic display
state.
DISP
4. To cancel automatic adjustment, press
.
DISP
When automatic adjustment begins, you cannot press any keys other than
.
DISP
is used for canceling adjustment.
The following instances are regarded as errors. In these instances, the factory set-
tings are returned to, and A L 1 2 is displayed. The A L 1 2 display can be cleared
only when automatic re-adjustment has ended successfully or when the power has
been reset.
- Fully closed count - fully open count < 500
- Fully closed count > fully open count
- Time from fully closed to fully open is less than 5s
- MFB disconnected alarm (A L 1 0, A L 1 1) occurs continuously or frequently
- The time taken for the MFB count to stabilize exceeds 5min
- Faulty wiring of MFB or switching relay
(However, note that all faulty wiring cannot be detected as an error.)
■ M .-t (motor valve opening adjustment fully open/closed time)
When M .-C is set to 2, the set time is taken as the base for all operations. Enter the time
correctly in 0.1s units.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Event configuration data settings “E v”
No. Item Code
1
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
E T 1
0
PV type events
0: PV direct
Event 1 type
1: PV reverse
2: Deviation direct
3: Deviation reverse
4: Absolute value deviation1 direct
5: Absolute value deviation1 reverse
6: SP direct
7: SP reverse
8: MV direct
9: MV reverse
10: MFB direct
11: MFB reverse
12 to 49: NOP
Time events
50: Time event
51 to 99: NOP
Controller status events
100: RUN+HOLD+FAST+END
101: READY
102: RUN
103: HOLD
104: FAST
105: END
106: G.Soak standby
107: MANUAL
108: Auto-tuning executing
109: Constant-value operation
110: MFB estimated position control
111: Sum of all alarms
112: PV range alarm
113: Controller alarm
114: Low battery voltage
115: Console setup in progress
116: Loader setup in progress
117: ADV (ON time 1s)
118 to 199: NOP
[Note]
Setting can be changed only in READY mode.
0: Standby OFF
2
E D 1
0
Event 1 standby
1: Standby ON
[Note]
The controller stands by after power is restored and in
the READY mode. When the event type setting is ≥ 50,
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
0 to 200U (when event type is neither MV nor MFB)
0.0 to 20.0% (when event type is MV or MFB)
[Note]
3
4
H Y S 1
5
0
Event 1 hysteresis
When the event type setting is ≥ 50, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
0 to 3600s
D L 1
Event 1 ON delay
time
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
5
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
E T 2
0
PV type events
0: PV direct
Event 2 type
1: PV reverse
2: Deviation direct
3: Deviation reverse
4: Absolute value deviation1 direct
5: Absolute value deviation1 reverse
6: SP direct
7: SP reverse
8: MV direct
9: MV reverse
10: MFB direct
11: MFB reverse
12 to 49: NOP
Time events
50: Time event
51 to 99: NOP
Controller status events
100: RUN+HOLD+FAST+END
101: READY
102: RUN
103: HOLD
104: FAST
105: END
106: G.Soak standby
107: MANUAL
108: Auto-tuning executing
109: Constant-value operation
110: MFB estimated position control
111: Sum of all alarms
112: PV range alarm
113: Controller alarm
114: Low battery voltage
115: Console setup in progress
116: Loader setup in progress
117: ADV (ON time 1s)
118 to 199: NOP
[Note]
Setting can be changed only in READY mode.
6
E D 2
0
Event 2 standby
0: Standby OFF
1: Standby ON
[Note]
The controller stands by after power is restored and in
the READY mode. When the event type setting is ≥ 50,
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
7
8
H Y S 2
5
0
0 to 200U (when event type is neither MV nor MFB)
0.0 to 20.0% (when event type is MV or MFB)
[Note]
Event 2 hysteresis
When the event type setting is ≥ 50, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
D L 2
0 to 3600s
Event 2 ON delay
time
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
9
E T 3
0
PV type events
0: PV direct
Event 3 type
1: PV reverse
2: Deviation direct
3: Deviation reverse
4: Absolute value deviation1 direct
5: Absolute value deviation1 reverse
6: SP direct
7: SP reverse
8: MV direct
9: MV reverse
10: MFB direct
11: MFB reverse
12 to 49: NOP
Time events
50: Time event
51 to 99: NOP
Controller status events
100: RUN+HOLD+FAST+END
101: READY
102: RUN
103: HOLD
104: FAST
105: END
106: G.Soak standby
107: MANUAL
108: Auto-tuning executing
109: Constant-value operation
110: MFB estimated position control
111: Sum of all alarms
112: PV range alarm
113: Controller alarm
114: Low battery voltage
115: Console setup in progress
116: Loader setup in progress
117: ADV (ON time 1s)
118 to 199: NOP
[Note]
Setting can be changed only in READY mode.
10 E D 3
0
Event 3 standby
0: Standby OFF
1: Standby ON
[Note]
The controller stands by after power is restored and in
the READY mode. When the event type setting is ≥ 50,
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
11 H Y S 3
5
0
Event 3 hysteresis
0 to 200U (when event type is neither MV nor MFB)
0.0 to 20.0% (when event type is MV or MFB)
[Note]
When the event type setting is ≥ 50, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
12 D L 3
Event 3 ON delay
time
0 to 3600s
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
0: T1 to T5 are all time events.
13 T T
0
Time event type
1: T1 is a segment No. event.
T2 to T5 are time events.
2: T1 and T2 are segment No. events.
T3 to T5 are time events.
3: T1 to T3 are segment No. events.
T4 and T5 are time events.
4: T1 to T4 are segment No. events.
T5 is a time event.
5: All T1 to T5 are segment No. events.
[Note]
On models not supporting time events, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
Settings can be changed only in the READY mode.
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Description of event configuration data
■ E D 1 (event 1 standby)
■ E D 2 (event 2 standby)
■ E D 3 (event 3 standby)
0: Standby OFF
1: Standby ON
• When set to standby ON, event output becomes OFF if the controller is in the standby
state even if the condition for turning event output ON is satisfied.
• The controller enters the standby state in the following instances:
- When in the READY mode
- When shifting from the READY to the RUN mode
- When the power is turned ON
• The standby state is canceled in the following instances:
- When the condition for turning event output OFF (not including the hysteresis pe-
riod) is satisfied in one of the RUN, HOLD or FAST modes
- When set to standby OFF
• In the following example, PV event direct, operating point 500°C, hysteresis 10°C and
standby ON are set. When the mode changes from READY to the RUN mode at PV
550°C, the controller enters the standby state, so event output is turned OFF.
• Standby functions only when the event type is set to PV type event, and does not
function when set to time event type or controller status type.
■ D L 1 (event 1 ON delay time)
■ D L 2 (event 2 ON delay time)
■ D L 3 (event 3 ON delay time)
• The ON delay time is processed after completing all processes up to event output standby
ON/OFF. Event output is turned ON when more than the ON delay time has elapsed
with the condition for turning event output ON satisfied.
• When the event type is set to ADV, the ON delay function does not operate whatever
value is set as the ON delay time.
• ON delay time is processed as follows.
Event OFF conditions
Event output OFF
Event OFF conditions
Event ON conditions
Event output ON
Event output OFF
Time
ON delay time
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ PID parameter settings “P I d”
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
: 0.0 to 999.9% (0D, 6D output models)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P -1
100.0
P
Proportional band
(PID set 1)
0.0 enables ON-OFF control.
0.1 to 999.9% (models other than 0D and 6D output
models)
1 -1
0
Reset time
(PID set 1)
D -1
0
I
: 0 to 3600s
Rate time
0 disables integrating action.
: 0 to 1200s
(PID set 1)
O L -1
O H -1
R E -1
D R -1
D P -1
0.0
100.0
50.0
0
D
MV lower limit
(PID set 1)
0 disables derivative action.
O L : -10.0 to MV upper limit %
O H : MV lower limit to 110.0%
R E : 0.0 to 100.0%
MV upper limit
(PID set 1)
Manual reset
(PID set 1)
B R : 0 to 30
0 disables the brake function.
D P : 0.1 to 999.9%
Brake
(PID set 1)
100.0
D 1 : 1 to 3600s
Disturbance inhibit
proportional band
(PID set 1)
D D : 0 to 1200
0 disables derivative action.
9
D 1 -1
Disturbance inhibit
reset time
120
0
[Note]
(PID set 1)
• On 0D and 6D output models, when P setting is 0.0,
ON-OFF control is enabled. “– – – –” is displayed for
items I, D, O L, O H, R E, D P, D I and D D, and
setting is not possible.
10 D D -1
Disturbance inhibit
rate time
(PID set 1)
11 P -2
Proportional band
(PID set 2)
100.0
0
• When variable parameter M . -C setting is 2 (estimated
position control only) on 2G output models,
“– – – –” is displayed for items O L and O H, and
setting is not possible.
12 1 -2
Reset time
(PID set 2)
13 D -2
Rate time
0
• When I setting is not 0, “– – – –” is displayed for R E
(PID set 2)
and setting is not possible.
14 O L -2
15 O H -2
16 R E -2
17 B R -2
18 D P -2
MV lower limit
(PID set 2)
0.0
• When variable parameter S T setting is 0 (smart-tuning
disabled), “– – – –” is displayed for B R and setting is
not possible.
MV upper limit
(PID set 2)
100.0
50.0
0
• When variable parameter 2 P 1 D setting is 0 (2
Manual reset
(PID set 2)
degrees of freedom PID disabled), the items for
Brake
D P, D 1, D D are not displayed.
(PID set 2)
• On heat/cool models, the set No. of the PID parameter
used for the PID set No. is as follows:
Disturbance inhibit
proportional band
(PID set 2)
100.0
PID Set No. Designated in the
PID Set PID Set
19 D I -2
Disturbance inhibit
reset time
120
0
Program or Zone No. According
(heat) (cool)
to Automatic Selection of PID Set
(PID set 2)
1
2
3
4
1
3
5
7
2
4
6
8
Disturbance inhibit
rate time
20 D D -2
(PID set 2)
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
Proportional band
(PID set 3)
21 P -3
100.0
• When variable parameter 2 P 1 D setting is 1 (2
degrees of freedom PID enabled), the parameter (P, 1,
D) ideal for control when SP changes and the param-
eter (D P, D 1, D D) ideal for inhibiting disturbance
during settling are automatically switched.
Reset time
22 1 -3
0
(PID set 3)
Rate time
23 D -3
0
(PID set 3)
MV lower limit
(PID set 3)
• Decreasing the proportional band (P, D P) value
improves controllability. However, it also makes
overshoot or hunting more likely to occur.
24 O L -3
25 O H -3
26 R E -3
27 B R -3
28 D P -3
0.0
100.0
50.0
0
MV upper limit
(PID set 3)
Use of the controller on a motor or actuator shortens
the controller’s life. Do not set the proportional band
(P, D P) to too small a value.
Manual reset
(PID set 3)
Brake
(PID set 3)
• Decreasing the reset time (1, D 1) improves trackability.
However, it also makes cycling caused by integrating
action more likely to occur.
Disturbance inhibit
proportional band
(PID set 3)
100.0
When 1 setting is 0, integrating operation for inhibiting
disturbance also functions.
Disturbance inhibit
reset time
29 D I -3
120
0
(PID set 3)
• Increasing the rate time (D, D D) allows overshoot to
be inhibited more easily. However, it also make
hunting more likely to occur as the controller reacts to
minute changes in PV.
Disturbance inhibit
rate time
30 D D -3
(PID set 3)
Proportional band
(PID set 4)
31 P -4
100.0
0
In a temperature control system, setting the rate time
to /3 to 1/4 of the integrating time is generally consid-
1
Reset time
32 1 -4
ered to be appropriate. In a pressure or flow rate
control system, derivative action causes hunting.
Either set the D setting to 0.0 to disable derivative
action, or decrease the setting so that derivative action
is almost negligible. The latter solution is more
frequently adopted.
(PID set 4)
Rate time
33 D -4
0
(PID set 4)
MV lower limit
(PID set 4)
34 O L -4
35 O H -4
36 R E -4
37 B R -4
38 D P -4
0.0
MV upper limit
(PID set 4)
100.0
50.0
0
• The MV upper and lower limits (O L, O H) function as
integrating limits. When the MV reaches the upper or
lower limit, integration no longer functions. This
prevents reset wind-up that occurs when the PV has
not risen for a long time.
Manual reset
(PID set 4)
Brake
(PID set 4)
Disturbance inhibit
proportional band
(PID set 4)
100.0
• Manual reset (R E) is a setting for eliminating offset
that occurs during proportional action (integrated
action disabled). For manual reset, set the MV ideal for
deviation 0.
Disturbance inhibit
reset time
39 D 1 -4
120
0
(PID set 4)
Disturbance inhibit
rate time
40 D D -4
• Increasing the brake (B R) value increases the
overshoot inhibit effect. However, it also lengthens the
rise time.
(PID set 4)
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
41 P -5
100.0
Proportional band
(PID set 5)
42 1 -5
0
Reset time
(PID set 5)
43 D -5
0
Rate time
(PID set 5)
44 O L -5
45 O H -5
46 R E -5
47 B R -5
48 D P -5
0.0
100.0
50.0
0
MV lower limit
(PID set 5)
MV upper limit
(PID set 5)
Manual reset
(PID set 5)
Brake
(PID set 5)
100.0
Disturbance inhibit
proportional band
(PID set 5)
49 D 1 -5
120
0
Disturbance inhibit
reset time
(PID set 5)
50 D D -5
Disturbance inhibit
rate time
(PID set 5)
51 P -6
Proportional band
(PID set 6)
100.0
0
52 1 -6
Reset time
(PID set 6)
53 D -6
Rate time
0
(PID set 6)
54 O L -6
55 O H -6
56 R E -6
57 B R -6
58 D P -6
MV lower limit
(PID set 6)
0.0
MV upper limit
(PID set 6)
100.0
50.0
0
Manual reset
(PID set 6)
Brake
(PID set 6)
Disturbance inhibit
proportional band
(PID set 6)
100.0
59 D 1 -6
Disturbance inhibit
reset time
120
0
(PID set 6)
60 D D -6
Disturbance inhibit
rate time
(PID set 6)
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
61 P -7
100.0
Proportional band
(PID set 7)
62 1 -7
0
Reset time
(PID set 7)
63 D -7
0
Rate time
(PID set 7)
64 O L -7
65 O H -7
66 R E -7
67 B R -7
68 D P -7
0.0
100.0
50.0
0
MV lower limit
(PID set 7)
MV upper limit
(PID set 7)
Manual reset
(PID set 7)
Brake
(PID set 7)
100.0
Disturbance inhibit
proportional band
(PID set 7)
69 D 1 -7
120
0
Disturbance inhibit
reset time
(PID set 7)
70 D D -7
Disturbance inhibit
rate time
(PID set 7)
71 P -8
Proportional band
(PID set 8)
100.0
0
72 1 -8
Reset time
(PID set 8)
73 D -8
Rate time
0
(PID set 8)
74 O L -8
75 O H -8
76 R E -8
77 B R -8
78 D P -8
MV lower limit
(PID set 8)
0.0
MV upper limit
(PID set 8)
100.0
50.0
0
Manual reset
(PID set 8)
Brake
(PID set 8)
Disturbance inhibit
proportional band
(PID set 8)
100.0
79 D 1 -8
Disturbance inhibit
reset time
120
0
(PID set 8)
80 D D -8
Disturbance inhibit
rate time
(PID set 8)
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Setup data settings “S E t”
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
1
C 0 1
0
Control action (CH1)
0: Reverse action (heat)
1: Direct action (cool)
[Note]
On heat/cool models, “– – – –” is displayed and setting
is not possible.
On other models, external switch input can invert
direct/reverse action on the setting of C 0 1.
0: °C
1: °F
[Note]
2
3
C 0 2
0
0
Input 1 temperature
unit
When the input 1 range type is linear, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
0 to 73
C 0 3
Input 1 range type
0 to 20: Thermocouple
32 to 40, 48 to 56: Resistance temperature detector
64 to 73: Linear (dc current, dc voltage)
[Note]
Refer to the input 1 range table. Operation according
to a setting not listed in this table is not fixed.
0 to 3
4
C 0 4
Input 1 range
decimal point
position
Not fixed
[Note]
When the input 1 range type is non-linear, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
When the input 1 range type is changed from non-
linear to linear, the original non-linear range values
remain.
5
6
C 0 5
C 0 6
Input 1 range lower Not fixed
limit (0%)
-1999 to 9999U
[Note]
When the input 1 range type is non-linear, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
When the input 1 range type is changed from non-
linear to linear, the original non-linear range values
remain.
Input 1 range upper Not fixed
limit (100%)
The relationship between the analog inputs and
readout values can be inverted by inverting the upper
and lower limit values.
Input 1 root extrac-
tion dropout
0.0 to 10.0% (ratio to input range)
[Note]
7
8
9
C 0 7
C 0 8
C 0 q
0.0
0.0 disables square root extraction.
When the input 1 range type is non-linear, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
0: Disabled
Input 1 linearization
table approximation
0
1: Enabled
[Note]
Table data setting (a, b) is used for the linearization
table.
-1999 to upper limit U
SP1 lower limit
SP1 upper limit
0%FS
100%FS
[Note]
Changing the input 1 range has no effect on the range.
However, note that a general reset sets the range to
the 0%FS value of the input 1 range.
Lower limit to 9999U
10 C 1 0
[Note]
Changing the input 1 range has no effect on the range.
However, note that a general reset sets the range to
the 0%FS value of the input 1 range.
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
11 C 1 1
0
PID set auto-
0: OFF (PID set segment designation)
switching (CH1)
1: ON
[Note]
When set to 1, the PID set items in the program are
invalid.
The switching point for auto-switching is set in variable
parameters (C P . 1 1 to C P . 1 7).
12 C 1 2
0
0
0: OFF
MV setting at input 1
over-range (MV1)
MV at input 1 over-
range (MV1)
1: ON
13 C 1 3
-10 to 110%
[Note]
When C 1 2 setting is 0, “– – – –” is displayed and
setting is not possible.
0: Bump-less
14 C 1 4
Manual change
mode (MV1)
0
1: Preset
[Note]
When the programmer function is selected, operation
is bump-less regardless of the setting of C 1 4.
-10 to 110%
15 C 1 5
Preset manual value
(MV1)
0
0
[Note]
When C 1 4 setting is 0, “– – – –” is displayed and
setting is not possible.
MV in READY mode
(MV1, MV1 heat-
cool output)
-10 to 110%
16 C 1 6
[Note]
This setting is invalid even if the programmer function
is selected by C 1 8 setting.
On heat/cool models, this setting functions as the MV
(heat) setting in the READY mode.
17
18
0
0
C 1 7
-10 to 110%
[Note]
MV (cool) in READY
mode (MV1 heat-
cool output)
When the model is not a heat/cool model, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
0: MV1 output (controller function)
1: SP1 output (programmer function)
[Note]
Main output type
(CH1)
C 1 8
When the model is not a 5G output model, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
-1999 to 9999U
SP1 main output
lower limit (4mA
setting)
19 C 1 q
0U
[Note]
When the model is not a 5G output model and 8
setting is 0 on a 5G output model, “– – – –” is dis-
played and setting is not possible.
The relationship between the analog outputs and SP1
can be inverted by inverting the upper and lower limit
values.
SP1 main output
upper limit (20mA
setting)
20 C 2 0
1000U
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
21 C 2 1
22 C 2 2
23 C 2 3
24 C 2 4
25 C 2 5
26 C 2 6
27 C 2 7
28 C 2 8
29 C 2 q
30 C 3 0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
[Note]
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
7-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
31 C 3 1
32 C 3 2
33 C 3 3
34 C 3 4
35 C 3 5
36 C 3 6
37 C 3 7
38 C 3 8
39 C 3 Q
40 C 4 0
41 C 4 1
42 C 4 2
43 C 4 3
44 C 4 4
45 C 4 5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
[Note]
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
0
3-position control
0: 3-position control disabled
1: 3-position control enabled
[Note]
On models not supporting 3D output, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
0: PV1
46 C 4 6
0
Auxiliary output 1
type
1: SP1
2: Deviation1
3: MV1
4 to 7: NOP
8: MFB
9 to 11: NOP
[Note]
On models not supporting auxiliary output 1, “– – – –”
is displayed and setting is not possible.
When set to NOP (or to MFB on models other than 2G
output models), output is fixed to 4mA.
When set to SP or deviation, output in the READY
mode is fixed to 4mA.
-1999 to 9999U
47 C 4 7
0
Auxiliary output 1
lower limit (4mA)
-199.9 to 999.9%
[Note]
When the auxiliary output type is MV or MFB, the unit is
%. Otherwise, the unit is U.
0: PV1
48 C 4 8
Auxiliary output 1
upper limit (20mA)
Auxiliary output 2
type
1000
0
49 C 4 q
1: SP1
2: Deviation1
3: MV1
4 to 7: NOP
8: MFB
9 to 11: NOP
[Note]
When auxiliary output 2 is not supported, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
When set to NOP (or to MFB on models other than 2G
output models), output is fixed to 4mA.
When set to SP or deviation, output in the READY
mode is fixed to 4mA.
7-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
-1999 to 9999U
-199.9 to 999.9%
[Note]
50 C 5 0
Auxiliary output 2
lower limit (4mA)
Auxiliary output 2
lower limit (20mA)
0
51 C 5 1
1000
When the auxiliary output type is MV or MFB, the unit is
%. Otherwise, the unit is U.
External switch
input RSW5
assignment
52 C 5 2
53 C 5 3
54 C 5 4
0
0
0
0: NOP
1: Fast operation
2: PV start
External switch
input RSW6
assignment
3: NOP
4: AT start/stop
5: NOP
External switch
input RSW7
assignment
6: Manual/auto operation
7: Cancel G.Soak by OR conditions
8: Cancel G.Soak by AND conditions
9: Direct/reverse action inversion
10 to 20: NOP
[Note]
On external switch 4-input models, “– – – –” is dis-
played and setting is not displayed.
When the same assignment is set to two or more RSWs,
the RSW setting with the lowest No. is valid.
When this setting is set to NOP, the controller state is
not switched by external switch input ON/OFF. The
controller state can be switched ON/OFF by communi-
cations.
PARA
assignment
1000 to 5000
[Note]
55 C 5 5
56 C 5 6
57 C 5 7
58 C 5 8
59 C 5 q
60 C 6 0
61 C 6 1
62 C 6 2
63 C 6 3
64 C 6 4
65 C 6 5
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
0
item 1
PARA
assignment
To set the No., add the No. of the item to be assigned
PARA
item 2
PARA
to
to the following values for the setting group
assignment
containing that item.
item 3
PARA
• 1000: Constant-value operation data
• 1500: PID parameter
assignment
item 4
PARA
• 2500: Variable parameter
• 3500: Event configuration data
• 4000: Table data
assignment
item 5
PARA
assignment
• 4500: Setup data
item 6
PARA
Assignments to which a nonexistent No. have been set
are invalid.
assignment
item 7
PARA
assignment
item 8
Operation comple-
tion state
0: READY
1: END
Program time unit
0: h/min
0
1: min/s
Time display
PV display
0: Remaining segment time
0
1: Total operation time
[Note]
The total operation time returns to 0 in the READY mode.
0: ON
66 C 6 6
0
1: OFF
2: ON
3: OFF
[Note]
Settings 0 and 2, and 1 and 3 mean the same, respec-
tively.
7-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
0: Display ON
1: Display OFF
[Note]
67 C 6 7
Alarm display
Even when set to 1, alarm-related events do not
operate.
0: Display ON
68 C 6 8
69 C 6 q
70 C 7 0
71 C 7 1
Programming item:
Events 1 to 3
0
0
0
0
1: Display OFF
[Note]
Programming item:
Time events 1 to 5
Programming item:
PID set, G.Soak
Programming item:
PV start, cycle,
Even if each of the items are set to 1, the function
operates even if data is set to the program.
On models not supporting time events, time event
items are not displayed in program settings regardless
of the number of C 6 q settings.
pattern link
0: Compensated internally
Cold junction
compensation
72 C 7 2
73 C 7 3
74 C 7 4
0
0
0
1: Compensated externally
[Note]
When the input 1 range type is other than a thermo-
couple, “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not
possible.
0: Upscale
Input operation at
input 1 disconnec-
tion
1: Downscale
[Note]
This setting is valid when the input 1 range type is
thermocouple, resistance temperature detector or
linear (mV series).
0: Input ON again enabled within time-proportional cycle
1: Input ON again disabled within time-proportional cycle
[Note]
Voltage time-
proportional output
system
When both of outputs 1 and 2 are not voltage time-
proportional outputs, “– – – –” is displayed and setting
is not possible.
0: Current output
1: Voltage output
[Note]
Output 1 selection
Output 2 selection
75 C 7 5
76 C 7 6
Not fixed
Not fixed
When each of the outputs are relay output, position-
proportional output, auxiliary output or output is not
mounted, “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not
possible.
Factory setting is 1 if outputs are voltage output
according to output type. Otherwise, the setting is 0.
Unused
[Note]
77 C 7 7
78 C 7 8
79 C 7 q
—
15
15
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
2 to 22mA
[Note]
When each of the outputs are other than voltage output,
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
Normally, use the factory setting.
[Note]
Voltage output 1
adjustment
Voltage output 2
adjustment
Unused
80 C 8 0
—
0
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
Input 1 burnout cur-
rent (expansion set-
ting 1)
81 C 8 1
0: Burnout current ON
1: Burnout current OFF
[Note]
Normally set to 0.
Set to 1 when infra-red thermocouple RT50 is connected
to input 1.
7-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
82 C 8 2
0
Expansion setting 2
0: Expansion disabled
1: Expansion enabled
[Note]
This setting is for service use only.
[Note]
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
0 to 127
[Note]
On models not supporting communications, “– – – –” is
83 C 8 3
Unused
—
0
84 C 8 4
Station address
displayed and setting is not possible.
0 disables communication.
85 C 8 5
Transmission rate/
character format
0
0: 9600bps/even parity, 1 stop bit
1: 9600bps/no parity, 2 stop bits
2: 4800bps/even parity, 1 stop bit
3: 4800bps/no parity, 2 stop bits
[Note]
On models not supporting communications, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
86 C 8 6
87 C 8 7
88 C 8 8
89 C 8 q
90 C q 0
Unused
—
—
—
—
0
[Note]
Unused
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
Unused
Unused
Special functions
[Note]
Normally set to “0”.
Input 1 zener barrier
adjustment
[Note]
91
—
—
0
C q 1
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
Unused
92 C q 2
93 C q 3
94 C q 4
95 C q 5
[Note]
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
CPL communica-
tions port selection
PID type
0:
Add-on terminal
1 to 15: Loader jack (communications address)
0
0: Improved
1: Compatible with DCP200
[Note]
Unused
—
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
96 C q 6
97 C q 7
98 C q 8
99 C q q
100 C 0 0
—
—
—
—
—
[Note]
Hardware type 1
Hardware type 2
ROM ID
This setting is for service use only, and can only be
verified.
ROM item
ROM revision
7-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Description of setup data settings
■ C 0 7 (input 1 square root extraction dropout)
• Generally, the differential pressure detected by an orifice on a differential pressure
type flowmeter, is proportional to the square of the flowrate. For this reason, square
root extraction is carried out when uniform signals are required.
When input for square root extraction is the dropout value set by C 0 7 or less, output
from square root extraction processing can be set to 0%.
• When C 0 7 is set to 1, square root extraction is not carried out.
Output after square root
extraction (Y)
Y=(X/100)1/2 x 100
100%
Input (X)
100%
Dropout value
(variable in range 0.1 to 10.0%)
• Square root extraction is carried within the range 0.0 to 100.0%. In the ranges -10.0 to
0.0% and 100.0 to 110.0%, regular scaling is carried out.
■ C 0 q (SP1 lower limit)
■ C 1 0 (SP1 upper limit)
• This is a program setup pattern item, and functions as a limitter when setting or chang-
ing SP.
• In the program operation mode, this functions as a limitter on the value obtained by
adding the SP set to the program to the SP bias (variable parameter). The result of this
operation is taken as SP.
• This functions as a limitter when setting or changing the SP in constant-value data
setup.
• In the constant-value operation mode, this functions as a limitter on the value obtained
by adding the SP set to the constant-value operation data to the SP bias (variable pa-
rameter). The result of this operation is taken as SP.
■ C 4 7 (auxiliary output 1 lower limit)
■ C 4 8 (auxiliary output 1 upper limit)
■ C 5 0 (auxiliary output 2 lower limit)
■ C 5 1 (auxiliary output 2 upper limit)
• This is the scaling setting for auxiliary output. The values of the upper limit setting and
lower limit setting can also be inverted.
• In the following example, the type is set to MV at auxiliary input 1. 12mA is output
when MV is 100% and 20mA is output when MV is 0%. In the following figure, MV is
200% when virtually calculated at 4mA.
Accordingly, the setting of C 4 7 and C 4 8 become 200.0 and 0.0, respectively.
Auxiliary output 1
20 mA
12 mA
4 mA
MV
100%
200%
7-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ C 6 5 (time display)
0: Remaining segment time
1: Total operation time
• This selects the time display in the basic display state in the program operation mode.
• When set to 0, in the READY mode, the time setting value of the currently selected
segment is displayed.
• When set to 0, in the RUN, HOLD, FAST or END modes, the remaining time for the
currently executing segment is displayed after being rounded down.
For example, if the remaining time is 1h, 30min, 59s when the time unit is set to “h:min”,
the time display is “1 .3 0”.
• When set to 1, in the READY mode, the time display is “0 .0 0”.
• When set to 1, in the RUN, HOLD, FAST or END modes, the time it takes to shift from
the READY to the RUN mode is displayed after being round down. Also, after
“q q .5 q” the time display changes to “0 .0 0”.
For example, if the remaining time is 101h, 30min, 59s when the total operation time is
set to “h:min”, the time display is “1 .3 0”.
• In the FAST mode, the time display changes according to the FAST scale if this pa-
rameter is set to either 0 or 1.
■ C 6 6 (PV display)
This selects PV display in the basic display state. You can select between numerical
display or no display at all. The setting of this parameter does not influence PV-related
input processing, PID operation, event output, auxiliary output and alarm display.
Also, to eliminate PV alarm display or PV alarm event output, select the thermocouple
range by the input range to short-circuit the input terminals.
■ C 7 2 (cold junction compensation)
0: Compensated internally
1: Compensated externally
• This selects how thermocouple cold junctions are to be compensated.
• When set to 1, carry out 0°C compensation by an ice box, for example.
■ C 7 4 (voltage time-proportional output system)
0: Input ON again enabled within time-proportional cycle
1: Input ON again disabled within time-proportional cycle
• This selects whether or not to turn output ON again even if output is OFF when the
results of PID operation have changed during the time-proportional cycle (cycle time).
• The figure below shows each of these differences.
Setting=0
Cycle time
Cycle time
ON
OFF
PID operation result
Setting=1
20%
50%
40%
Cycle time
Cycle time
ON
OFF
PID operation result
20%
50%
40%
7-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ C 7 8 (voltage output 1 adjustment)
■ C 7 q (voltage output 2 adjustment)
When driving an SSR by voltage time-proportional output, the output voltage of the
controller must be within the input rated voltage (optimum ignition voltage) of the SSR.
On the DCP301, a newly developed variable output system is utilized that enables output
of the optimum ignition voltage even when driving two or more SSRs.
This system sets the optimum current value on the controller so that the optimum ignition
voltage with respect to the internal impedance of the SSR side can be obtained.
The following shows equivalent circuits and related formulas.
• Description of Symbols
(1) Details
IO
: Setting output current of controller (setting range: 2 to 22mA)
: Maximum applied load voltage (approx. 14.7V)
: Actual input voltage to SSR
VO
VSSR’
VSSR
: Input rated voltage range of SSR (VSSR/MIN to VSSR/MAX)
VSSR/MIN : Minimum input rated voltage of SSR
VSSR/MAX : Maximum input rated voltage of SSR
Z
: Internal impedance of SSR
VD
: Internal voltage drop of SSR (normally 1 to 2V)
(2) Equivalent circuit when one SSR is connected
DCP301
SSR
+
+
Z
I
O
VSSR'
(VO
)
VD
–
–
Formulas (1) and (2) formulas must be satisfied.
(1) formula VSSR/MIN ≤ IO x Z + VD ≤ VO
(2) formula VSSR' < VSSR/MAX
(VSSR' = IO x Z + VD)
7-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
(3) Equivalent circuit when N number of SSRs are connected in series
DCP301
SSR 1
+
+
Z
IO
(VO)
VSSR'
VD
–
–
SSR N
+
Z
VSSR'
VD
–
Formulas (3) and (4) formulas must be satisfied.
(3) formula VSSR/MIN ≤ IO x Z + VD ≤ VO/N
(4) formula VSSR' ≤ VSSR/MAX
(VSSR' = IO x Z + VD)
(4) Equivalent circuit when N number of SSRs are connected in parallel
DCP301
SSR 1
SSR N
+
+
+
IO/N
IO/N
Z
Z
IO
(VO)
VSSR'
VSSR'
VD
VD
–
–
–
Formulas (5) and (6) formulas must be satisfied.
(5) formula VSSR/MIN ≤ IO/N x Z + VD ≤ VO
(6) formula VSSR' ≤ VSSR/MAX
(VSSR' = IO/N x Z + VD)
7-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
(5) Example: Using Yamatake Corporation’s PGM
VSSR : 3 to 6V
Z
VD
: 260Ω ± 5%
: 0.8 to 1.3V
• What value should IO be set to when connecting one PGM?
As shown in the figure on the right, a fixed-current system is used for the voltage
output of this controller. The fixed current can be calculated as follows from the
input voltage range of PGM.
Z
8.9mA ≤ 1 ≤ 17.2mA
IMIN x ZMIN + VD/MIN > 3
IMIN > 8.9mA
I
VD
IMAX x ZMAX + VD/MAX < 6
IMAX < 17.2mA
DCP301
PGM
• How many PGMs can be connected?
A current of 8.9mA or more must flow to a single PGM. On the other hand, the
maximum current of the controller is 22.0mA. Accordingly, two PGMs can be con-
nected in parallel.
In the case of a series connection, due to the maximum output current (22.0mA)
and allowable load resistance (600Ω), the maximum voltage that can be applied to
a load becomes 13.2V (22.0mA x 600Ω).
When a current of 8.9mA flows to a PGM, the maximum voltage at both of its input
terminals becomes 3.7V.
0.0089 x 260 x 1.05 + 1.3 = 3.7V
Accordingly, 13.2 ÷ 3.7 = 3.56, which means that three PGMs can be connected in
series.
The above calculation assumes operation in the worst conditions. For example,
even if four PGMs are connected in series, they should operate normally if a volt-
age of 3V or more is applied to each of the PGMs in a voltage ON state.
■ C q 0 (Special functions)
• Normally set to 0.
• In the case of setup 102, current output (including heat-cool output) 0 to 100% for the
control output becomes 0 to 20mA. Note, however, that at 0% or less, the current is
0mA.
At output 1mA or less, accuracy is ±0.5%.
• In the case of setup 103, current output (including heat-cool output) and auxiliary out-
put 0 to 100% for the control output becomes 0 to 20mA. Note, however, that at 0% or
less, the current is 0mA.
At output 1mA or less, accuracy is ±0.5%.
• When the input 1 range type (C 0 3) is an RTD in setup 241, Zener barrier adjustment
(C 9 1) is displayed.
7-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ C q 1 (Input 1 Zener barrier adjustment)
The following adjustment must be made when using a Zener barrier.
(1) Turn the DCP301 OFF. When you have finished mounting and wiring the DCP301,
short-circuit across A and B on the terminals of the RTD.
C
DCP301
32
33
34
Zener barrier
Zener barrier
Zener barrier
B
A
Short-circuit
(2) Turn the DCP301 ON again, and set setup data C q 0 setting to 241. For details on
how to change settings, see 7-1 Parameter Setup (page 7-1).
(3) Display the setup data C q 1 setting.
ENT
(4) Press
to display the difference (A—B) between the resistances of the Zener bar-
rier connected to leads A and B on the lower display.
ENT
(5) Press
to memorize the difference (A—B) between the resistances to the control-
ler.
DISP
(6) Press
to set the DCP301 to the basic display state.
(7) Turn the power OFF, and remove the short across A and B.
Handling Precautions
• The resistance error of the Zener barrier connected to leads A and B cannot be
adjusted unless it is 20Ω or less.
• This adjustment is not required when a Zener barrier and an input other than
an RTD are not used.
• Once the Zener barrier has been adjusted, compensation is carried out on the
Zener barrier. When using on an RTD without a Zener barrier, re-adjust without
the Zener barrier.
7-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ C 9 3 (CPL communications port selection)
• When set to 0, CPL communications from the loader jack is not possible. In this case,
CPL communications is possible from the addon terminal under setup C 8 4 and C 8 5
communications conditions if the controller model supports CPL communications.
• When set to 1 to 15, CPL communications from the loader jack is not possible, and the
C 9 3 setting becomes the CPL communications address.
Communications conditions are also 4800bps, even parity and 1 stop bit.
In this case, CPL communications is not possible from the addon terminal even if the
controller model supports CPL communications.
• Use the special cable to connect the RS-232C port on the personal computer and the
loader jack on the equipment.
• When the setup C 0 0 (ROM revision) setting indication is 0 or 1, the setup C 9 3
setting indication cannot be set at “---”.
Also, communications from the loader jack is not possible.
7-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Table data settings “T B L”
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
-1999 to 9999U
[Note]
Input linearization table
approximation A1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
T -A . 1
T -A . 2
T -A . 3
T -A . 4
T -A . 5
T -A . 6
T -A . 7
T -A . 8
T -A . q
0U
When setup data C 0 8 setting is 0, “– – – –” is
displayed and setting is not possible.
Input linearization table
approximation A2
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
0U
Item An displays input (X-axis) and Bn displays output
(Y-axis). In principle, set so that A1 is ≤ A2, A2 ≤ A3
and so forth up to A10 ≤ A11. Linear interpolation is
carried out between points on the linearization table.
The ends of the linearization table are fixed to (A0,
B0) = (-2000, -2000) and (A12, B12) = (10000, 10000).
When An≤ X ≤An+1, Y becomes (X-An) x (Bn+1-Bn)/(An+1-
An)+Bn.
Input linearization table
approximation A3
Input linearization table
approximation A4
Input linearization table
approximation A5
Input linearization table
approximation A6
Input linearization table
approximation A7
Input linearization table
approximation A8
Input linearization table
approximation A9
10 T -A . A
11 T -A . B
12 T -B . 1
13 T -B . 2
14 T -B . 3
15 T -B . 4
16 T -B . 5
17 T -B . 6
18 T -B . 7
19 T -B . 8
20 T -B . Q
21 T -B . A
22 T -B . B
Input linearization table
approximation A10
Input linearization table
approximation A11
Input linearization table
approximation B1
Input linearization table
approximation B2
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
1000U
Input linearization table
approximation B3
Input linearization table
approximation B4
Input linearization table
approximation B5
Input linearization table
approximation B6
Input linearization table
approximation B7
Input linearization table
approximation B8
Input linearization table
approximation B9
Input linearization table
approximation B10
Input linearization table
approximation B11
7-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Description of table data settings
■ t -A . 1 to t -A . b
■ t -b . 1 to t -b . b
• These settings are for the A-axis (input) and B-axis (output) settings of input 1 linear-
ization table approximation.
• Both ends of the linearization table are fixed at -2000U, -2000U and 10000U,10000U.
The linearization table is formed by connecting 11 points of table data settings be-
tween the two ends.
• Table data is set not by percentages but directly by engineering unit. When the range
type is set to linear, set scaled values.
Fixed value
B-axis (output)
(10000, 10000)
11
10
8
9
7
6
5
A-axis (input)
4
3
2
1
Fixed value
(-2000, -2000)
• Points on the broken-line, An and Bn, must be set so that they increase in the following
way (A1, B1) = (0, 0), (A2, B2) = (100, 100) and so forth. If set points break this relation-
ship, the point in conflict must be excluded to create the linearization table.
B-axis
B-axis
Excluded
(A3, B3)
(A3, B3)
(A2, B2)
(A2, B2)
(A1, B1)
(A1, B1)
A-axis
A-axis
• When two equal points such as A1 and A2 are set for the A-axis, B1 shall be taken as the
output value.
B-axis
(A2, B2)
(A1, B1)
A-axis
7-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7. PARAMETER SETUP
■ Constant-value operation data settings “C N S t”
No. Item Code
Item
Factory
Setting Setting
User
Setting
1
M .O D E
0
0: Program operation
Operation mode
1: Constant-value operation
[Note]
This setting can be changed only in the READY mode.
This setting can be set in the SP1 lower to upper limit
range in setup data settings C 0 q and C 1 0.
2
3
4
5
6
S P
0
SP1
[Note]
S P 2
E V 1
E V 2
E V 3
0
Unused
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
-1999 to 9999U (event type is deviation or SP)
9999
9999
9999
Event 1 setting
value
0 to 9999U
(event type is absolute value deviation)
-10.0 to 110.0% (event type is MV or MFB)
[Note]
Event 2 setting
value
When the event configuration data type setting is ≥ 50
for each event, “– – – –” is displayed and setting is not
possible.
Event 3 setting
value
[Note]
7
8
—
—
—
—
Unused
—
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
Unused
—
9
Unused
—
10
Unused
—
11 P .
Proportional band
(CH1)
100.0
P
: 0.0 to 999.9% (0D, 6D output models)
0.0 enables ON-OFF control.
0.1 to 999.9% (models other than 0D and 6D
models)
12 I .
13 D .
Reset time (CH1)
Rate time (CH1)
0
0
14 O L .
15 O H .
16 R E .
17 B R .
18 D P .
MV lower limit (CH1) 0.0
I
: 0 to 3600s
MV upper limit (CH1)
Manual reset (CH1)
Brake (CH1)
100.0
0 disables integral action.
: 0 to 1200s
50.0
0
D
0 disables derivative action.
Disturbance inhibit
proportional band
(CH1)
100.0
O L : -10.0 to MV upper limit %
O H : MV lower limit to 110.0%
R E : 0.0 to 100.0%
19 D I .
Disturbance inhibit
reset time (CH1)
Disturbance inhibit
rate time (CH1)
120
0
B R : 0 to 30
0 disables the brake function.
D P : 0.1 to 999.9%
20 D D .
D I : 1 to 3600s
Proportional band
(for cool control)
Reset time (CH1)
(for cool control)
Rate time (CH1) (for
cool control)
21 P .-C
22 I .-C
23 D .-C
24 O L .-C
25 O H .-C
26 R E .-C
100.0
0
D D : 0 to 1200
0 disables derivative action.
[Note]
0
• On 0D and 6D output models, when P setting is 0.0,
ON-OFF control is enabled. “– – – –” is displayed for
items I, D, O L, O H, R E, D P, D I and D D, and
setting is not possible.
MV lower limit (CH1)
(for cool control)
MV upper limit (CH1)
(for cool control)
Manual reset (CH1)
(for cool control)
0.0
100.0
50.0
• When variable parameter M .-C setting is 2 (estimated
position control only) on 2G output models, “– – – –” is
displayed for items OL and OH, and setting is not
possible.
• When I setting is not 0, “– – – –” is displayed for R E
and setting is not possible.
• When variable parameter S T setting is 0 (smart-tuning
disabled), “– – – –” is displayed for B R and setting is
not possible.
• When variable parameter 2 P I D setting is 0 (2
degrees of freedom PID disabled), the items for D P,
D I, D D are not displayed.
For details, see the Note for PID parameters.
[Note]
27
28
29
30
—
—
—
—
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
—
—
—
—
“– – – –” is displayed and setting is not possible.
7-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
8-1 Program Setup
Programs can be set up when the DCP301 is in the basic display state. This is sometimes referred to as “program-
ming” in this manual.
DISP
If the DCP301 is not in the basic display state, press
to set the controller to the basic display state.
Programming can be carried out more easily if the details of the setup are entered to a program chart before starting
programming.
■ How to enter program setup
■ Key operation
FUNC
PROG
Press
+
in the basic display state to enter program setup.
In the program setup state, the PRG LED on the console lights, and the decimal points in
the program No. display and segment No. display light. However, note that the DCP301
does not enter the program setup state in the following cases:
- When in the constant-value operation mode (when constant-value operation data
M . O d e setting is 1)
- When key lock is active (variable parameter L O C is set to 2 or 4)
Also, the setup cannot be changed even if the DCP301 is in the program setup in the
following case:
- When the program is protected (variable parameter P R t C is set to 1)
■ Display start items
When the DCP301 enters the program setup state, display starts from the program No.
and the segment No. pattern item.
■ Selecting the program No. to set up
There are two ways of selecting the program No. to set up.
- Selecting the program No. before entering program setup
- Selecting the program No. after entering program setup
■ Selecting the program No. before entering program setup
PROG
To select the program No. press
in the READY mode.
or
if the DCP301 is in the basic display state
Handling Precautions
The program No. cannot be selected on the DCP301 when selecting the pro-
gram No. by external switch inputs.
For details, see 6-3 Program Selection (page 6-7).
■ Selecting the program No. after entering program setup
FUNC
PROG
Each press of
19 is reached, the program No. returns to 1. Likewise, each press of
the program No. When 1 is returned to, the program No. advances to 19.
+
in the program setup state increments the program No. When
FUNC
+
decrements
However, note that when setup values are being entered (setting value is blinking) during
ENT
FUNC
PROG
program setup, press
first to quit entry of values and then press
+
or
FUNC
+
to change the program No.
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Selecting the program No. after entering program setup (continued)
When you select the program No. by this method, the display changes to segment No.1
and the pattern item on the programming map.
This method can be used, for example, to select a program No. to set up a program other
than the No. being operated in the RUN mode. It can also be used to select a program No.
to set up a program other than the currently selected No. by external switch input.
■ Mode transition
The following diagram shows the transition between modes during program setup.
The following page describes the various mode transition states (1) to (16) in the dia-
gram.
Basic Display State
FUNC
DISP
+
PROG keys (1)
key (16)
FUNC
FUNC
PROG keys
Program setup state
+
+
key (2)
key (3)
keys (15)
Setting value display state
ENT
ENT
ENT
FUNC
key (4)
key
+
keys (12)
FUNC
CLR
keys (10)
ENT
+
key
(pattern item)
DISP
DISP
DISP
key (11)
key (11)
key (14)
Segment insertion
or deletion check
state
No.1 setting
entry state
No.2 setting
entry state
ENT
“
“
I N S .” blinking
d E L .” blinking
key
FUNC
CLR
+
keys (6)
key (13)
key (9)
key (5)
FUNC
CLR
+
keys (7)
(pattern item)
Program clear
check state
ENT
“
C L R .” blinking
key
DISP
key (8)
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Description of mode transition states (see page 8-2.)
(1) Program setup is entered.
(2) Setup item on programming map is moved.
(3) Segment on programming map is moved.
(4) Entry of the No.1 setup is started.
(5) No.1 setting value incremented/decremented, and blinking digit is moved.
(6) Entry of No.1 setup is completed.
ENT
stores the value being entered to memory.
With items having a No.2 setup, entry of the No.2 setup value is started. When the
item does not have a No.2 setup, the setup display is returned to.
FUNC
CLR
When
+
are pressed at an event/time event item, the setting for that seg-
ment is cleared.
FUNC
CLR
When
+
are pressed at a G.Soak item, the setting for that segment is cleared.
FUNC
CLR
(7) Pressing
+
for a pattern item causes “C L R .” to blink to confirm clearing
of the program from that segment onwards.
ENT
FUNC
However, note that
+
is disabled for currently running programs.
ENT
(8)
clears the program from that segment onwards.
DISP
does not clear the program and the setting display is returned to.
(9) No.2 setup setting value incremented/decremented, and blinking digit moved
(
10) Entry of No.2 setup is completed.
ENT
stores the value being entered to memory.
FUNC
CLR
When
+
are pressed at an event/time event item, the setting for that seg-
ment is cleared.
(
(
11) Entry of values currently being entered completed without being stored to memory
ENT
FUNC
12) When
+
are pressed at a pattern item, the display changes to the segment
insert/delete screen, and “I n S .” is blinks.
ENT
FUNC
However, note that
+
is disabled for currently running programs.
(
(
13) “d E L .” displayed blinking by
, and “I n S .” displayed blinking by
.
ENT
ENT
14) If
is pressed at the “I n S .” display, a segment is inserted. If
is pressed, a
segment is “d E L .”.
DISP
(
(
15) If
is pressed, neither of segment delete or insert are carried out.
FUNC
FUNC
PROG
Press
gram Nos.
+
to increment program Nos, and
+
to decrement pro-
16) Basic display state is returned to.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Programming map
As shown in the figure below, the programming map is arranged in a matrix with the
segment Nos. aligned along the horizontal axis and program setup items arranged along
the vertical axis.
The area surrounded by thick black lines indicates the items that can be designated by
segment No. and program setup item in the program setup state.
,
,
:
Moves to the left or right (i.e. moves segments)
Moves up or down (i.e. moves program items).
:
The programming map below shows an example where segments No.1 to No.10 have
been set up.
Shaded items
cannot be moved.
Segment No.
. . . .
Program (1) No.1 setting
1
2
10
11
12 to 30 Remarks
Items
(2) No.2 setting
Pattern
(1) SP1
1 0 0
1 0 0 0
3 . 0 0
1 0 0
- - - -
- - - -
*1
*2
(2) Time
0 . 3 0
1 1 0 0
1 0 . 0 0
- - - -
Event 1
Event 2
Event 3
(1) Operating point (ON time)
(2) (OFF time)
(1) Operating point (ON time)
(2) (OFF time)
(1) Operating point (ON time)
(2) (OFF time)
(1) ON time
- - - -
- - - -
3 0
- - - -
0 . 0 0
0 . 0 1
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
1
0 . 0 0
0 . 0 1
0 . 0 0
1 . 0 0
1 . 0 0
2 . 0 0
2 . 0 0
3 . 0 0
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
2
0 . 0 0
0 . 0 1
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
0 . 0 0
- - - -
8
Time
event 1
*3
(2) OFF time
Time
event 2
(1) ON time
(2) OFF time
Time
event 3
(1) ON time
(2) OFF time
Time
event 4
(1) ON time
(2) OFF time
Time
event 5
(1) ON time
(2) OFF time
PID set No. (CH1)
G.Soak (CH1)
G.Soak time-out
PV start
*4
*5
- - - -
- - - -
1
- - - -
- - - -
1
- - - -
- - - -
1
Cycle
0
0
0
Pattern link
0
0
0
*1 The No.10 segment is the final segment. A non-set segment is shown in the No.11
segment.
*2 As PV type event is selected as the PV type for events 1 and 2, only the No.1 setting
can be set up. As time event is selected as the event type for event 3, the No.1 and
No.2 settings can be set up.
*3 As all time events are selected as the event type in the time event, the No.1 and No.2
settings can be set up.
*4 This can be set as controller functions are selected and PID or ON-OFF control is
carried out.
*5 As these are setting items for each program, the display and setting are common for
all segments.
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Display details
The following figure shows the conventions used for displays in this manual.
Program/Segment No. Display
Displays program/segment No. currently being set up.
Decimal point blinks in program setup state.
Basic indicator LED lamps
: LED lit
Program No. Segment No.
– – – –
– – – –
Upper display
Lower display
Pattern
tendency
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out
Event LEDs
Profile Display
■ Setting up pattern items
(1) In the setting display state, move to the pattern item of the segment to be set up on the
programming map.
ENT
(2) If you press
No.1 setup.
, the upper display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the
(3) Press
,
,
or to set to the No.1 setup SP setting.
Setting range: SP1 lower to upper limit
(Set the SP1 limit in setup data C 0 Q or C 1 0.)
ENT
(4) When you press
, blinking on the upper display stops. The lower display then
starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the No.2 setup.
(5) Press
,
,
or
to set to the No.2 setup time setting.
Setting range: 0:00 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)
0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s)
(Select either of h:min or min:s as the time unit in setup data C 6 4. “:” is substi-
tuted by “.” as it cannot be displayed.)
ENT
(6) When you press
, blinking on the lower display stops.
■ Display
Program No. Segment No.
SP1 setting value
Time setting value
SP
TM
Pattern
tendency
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out
“- - - -” is displayed for the SP and time setting values in non-set segments.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting up events 1 to 3 items
■ When event type is PV type event
(1) In the setting display state, move to the event 1 to 3 items of the segment to be set up
on the programming map.
ENT
(2) If you press
No.1 setup.
, the upper display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the
(3) Press
Setting range: -1999 to 9999U
0 to 9999U (in case of absolute value deviation event)
,
,
or
to set to the No.1 setup event operating point setting.
-10.0 to 110.0% (in case of MV, MFB event)
ENT
(4) When you press
, blinking on the upper display stops.
FUNC
CLR
(When
ing.)
+
are pressed, the upper display returns to “- - - -” and stops blink-
■ Display (PV type event)
Program No. Segment No.
Operating point setting value
Pattern
tendency
LEDs corresponding to EV1 to EV3 lit. T1 to T5 all out
• “- - - -” is displayed for the setting values in non-set segments.
• When setup data C 6 8 is set to 1, event 1 to 3 items on the programming map are
skipped and not displayed.
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ When event type is time event
(1) In the setting display state, move to the event 1 to 3 items of the segment to be set up
on the programming map.
ENT
(2) If you press
No.1 setup.
, the upper display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the
(3) Press
,
,
or to set to the No.1 setup ON time setting.
Setting range: 0:00 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)
0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s)
(Select either of h:min or min:s as the time unit in setup data C 6 4. “:” is substituted
by “.” as it cannot be displayed.)
ENT
(4) When you press
, blinking on the upper display stops. The lower display then
starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the No.2 setup.
FUNC
CLR
(When
+
are pressed, the upper and lower displays both return to “- - - -”
or to set to the No.2 setup ON time setting.
and blinking stops.)
(5) Press
,
,
Setting range: ON time setting + 0:01 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)
ON time setting + 0.1 to 599.9 (0.1s)
ENT
When you press
, blinking on the upper display stops.
FUNC
CLR
(6) (When
ing.)
+
are pressed, the upper display returns to “- - - -” and stops blink-
■ Display (time event)
Program No. Segment No.
ON time setting value
OFF time setting value
Pattern
tendency
LEDs corresponding to EV1 to EV3 lit. T1 to T5 all out
• “- - - -” is displayed for the setting values in non-set segments.
• When setup data C 6 8 is set to 1, event 1 to 3 items on the programming map are all
skipped and not displayed.
• When the event type is set to time event and the ON time is set to 99:59, “- - - -” is
displayed for the ON time and the display does not blink. In this case, the OFF time
cannot be set.
• When the event type is set to time event and the ON time is set higher than the time
setting of the pattern item, event output at that segment is OFF. However, note that
event output is ON when the mode changes to the END mode at segments whose ON
time and pattern item time are equal.
■ When event type is controller status event
In this case, the event item on the programming map is skipped and not displayed.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T
T
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting up time events 1 to 5
(1) In the setting display state, move to the event 1 to 5 items of the segment to be set up
on the programming map.
ENT
(2) If you press
No.1 setup.
, the upper display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the
(3) Press
,
,
or to set to the No.1 setup ON time setting.
Setting range: 0:00 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)
0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s)
(Select either of h:min or min:s as the time unit in setup data C 6 4. “:” is substituted by
“.” as it cannot be displayed.)
ENT
(4) When you press
, blinking on the upper display stops. The lower display then
starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the No.2 setup.
FUNC
CLR
(When
+
are pressed, the upper and lower displays both return to “- - - -”
and blinking stops.)
(5) Press
,
,
or to set to the No.2 setup ON time setting.
Setting range: ON time setting + 0:01 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)
ON time setting + 0.1 to 599.9 (0.1s)
ENT
(6) When you press
, blinking on the upper display stops.
FUNC
CLR
(When
+
are pressed, the upper display returns to “- - - -” and stops blinking.)
■ Display
Program No. Segment No.
ON time setting value
OFF time setting value
Pattern
tendency
LEDs corresponding to EV1 to EV3 lit. T1 to T5 all out
• “- - - -” is displayed for the setting values in non-set segments.
• On models that do not support time events, event 1 to 5 items on the programming map
are all skipped and not displayed. The table below shows time events by a «.
Time event No.
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
setting value
0
1
2
3
4
5
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
«
• When setup data C 6 Q is set to 1, event 1 to 5 items on the programming map are all
skipped and not displayed.
• When the ON time is set to 99:59, “- - - -” is displayed as the OFF time, and the display
does not blink.
• When the ON time is set higher than the time setting of the pattern item, event output
at that segment is OFF. However, note that event output is ON when the mode changes
to the END mode at segments whose ON time and pattern item time are equal.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting up PID set No. items
(1) In the setting display state, move to the PID set No. items of the segment to be set up
on the programming map.
ENT
(2) If you press
No.1 setup.
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the
(3) Press
,
,
or to set to the No.1 setup PID set No. setting.
Setting range: 0 to 8 (non heat/cool models)
0 to 4 (heat/cool models)
ENT
(4) When you press
, blinking on the upper display stops.
■ Display
Program No. Segment No.
PI D
Pattern
tendency
PID set No. setting value
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out
• When setup data C 1 1 is set to 1 and PID set auto-switching ON is selected, the PID set
No. items on the programming map are skipped and not displayed.
• On 5G output models, when setup data C 1 8 is set to 1 and programmer functions are
selected, the PID set No. items on the programming map are skipped and not dis-
played.
• On 3D output models, when setup data C 4 5 is set to 1 and 3-position-proportional
control is selected, the PID set No. items on the programming map are skipped and not
displayed.
• When setup data C 7 0 is set to 1, the PID set No. items on the programming map are all
skipped and not displayed.
• When the PID set No. setting is set to 0, this means that the PID set No. of the previous
segment is continued. When the PID set No. setting is set to 0 in the No.1 segments,
this is the same as being set to 1.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting up G.Soak (guarantee soak) items
(1) In the setting display state, move to the G.Soak item of the segment to be set up on the
programming map.
ENT
(2) If you press
No.1 setup.
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the
(3) Press
,
,
or
to set to the G.Soak width setting.
Setting range: 0 to 1000U
ENT
(4) When you press
, blinking on the lower display stops.
FUNC
CLR
(When
stops.)
+
are pressed, the lower display returns to “- - - -” and blinking
■ Display
Program No. Segment No.
G. S.
Pattern
tendency
G.Soak setting value
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out
• “- - - -” is displayed for the setting values in non-set segments.
The G.Soak function does not work in non-set segments.
• When setup data C 7 0 is set to 1, G.Soak items on the programming map are skipped
and not displayed.
■ Setting up G.Soak time-out items
(1) In the setting display state, move to the G.Soak time-out item of the segment to be set
up on the programming map.
ENT
(2) If you press
No.1 setup.
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the
(3) Press
,
,
or to set to the G.Soak time-out width setting.
Setting range: 0:00 to 99:59 (h:min/min:s)
0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s)
(Select either of h:min or min:s as the time unit is setup data C64.
“:” is substituted by “.” as it cannot display.)
ENT
(4) When you press
, blinking on the lower display stops.
FUNC
CLR
(When
stops.)
+
are pressed, the lower display returns to “- - - -” and blinking
■ Display
Program No. Segment No.
G. S. t O
Pattern
tendency
G.Soak time -out setting value
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out
• “- - - -” is displayed for the setting values in non-set segments.
The G.Soak time out function does not work in non-set segments.
• When setup data C 7 0 is set to 1, G.Soak time-out items on the programming map are
skipped and not displayed.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting up PV start items
(1) In the setting display state, move to the PV start items on the programming map.
(The settings are common to all segments as the PV start items are setting items
provided for each program.)
ENT
(2) If you press
No.1 setup.
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the
(3) Press
,
,
or
to set to the No.1 setup PV start setting.
Setting range: 0 to 1
0:PV start disabled
1:PV start enabled
ENT
(4) When you press
, blinking on the lower display stops.
■ Display
Program No. Segment No.
P.S T A
Pattern
tendency
PV start setting value
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out
• The settings are common to all segments as the PV start items are setting items pro-
vided for each program.
• When setup data C 7 1 is set to 1, PV start items on the programming map are skipped
and not displayed.
■ Setting up cycle items
(1) In the setting display state, move to the cycle items on the programming map.
(The settings are common to all segments as the cycle items are setting items pro-
vided for each program.)
ENT
(2) If you press
No.1 setup.
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the
(3) Press
,
,
or to set to the No.1 setup cycle setting.
Setting range: 0 to 9999
ENT
(4) When you press
, blinking on the lower display stops.
■ Display
Program No. Segment No.
C Y C L
Pattern
tendency
Cycle count setting value
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out
• The settings are common to all segments as the cycle items are setting items provided
for each program.
• When setup data C 7 1 is set to 1, cycle items on the programming map are skipped and
not displayed.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Setting up pattern link items
(1) In the setting display state, move to the pattern link items on the programming map.
(The settings are common to all segments as the pattern link items are setting items
provided for each program.)
ENT
(2) If you press
No.1 setup.
, the lower display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the
(3) Press
Setting range: 0 to 19
0:Pattern link disabled
,
,
or
to set to the No.1 setup pattern link setting.
1 to 19: Pattern link destination program No.
ENT
(4) When you press
, blinking on the lower display stops.
■ Display
Program No. Segment No.
P.L I N
Pattern
tendency
Link destination program No.
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out
• The settings are common to all segments as the pattern link items are setting items
provided for each program.
• When setup data C 7 1 is set to 1, pattern link items on the programming map are
skipped and not displayed.
■ Deleting programs
(1) In the setting display state, move to the pattern item of the segment from which the
program is to deleted on the programming map.
To delete all the segments of a particular program, move to the No.1 segment.
ENT
(2) If you press
No.1 setup.
, the upper display starts blinking to indicate start of entry to the
(So far, the procedure is the same as that for setting the pattern item.)
FUNC
CLR
(3) If you press
+
, the display changes to confirm clearing of the program, and
“C L R .” is displayed blinking in the upper display.
ENT
(4) Press
to execute deletion of the program.
(5) The DCP301 returns to the setting display state, both the upper and lower displays
change to “- - - -” to indicate no setting.
■ Display
Program No. Segment No.
C L R.
Pattern
tendency
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out
FUNC
CLR
• In the above procedure,
+
are pressed while entering values (SP setting value)
to the No.1 setup. However, the program can also be deleted by pressing
FUNC
CLR
+
while entering values (time setting value) to the No.2 setup.
• “- - - -” is displayed for the SP and time setting values in non-set segments.
• Currently running (RUN, HOLD, FAST, END) programs cannot be deleted.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
■ Inserting and deleting segments
(1) In the setting display state, move to the pattern item of the segment where the seg-
ment is to be inserted or deleted on the programming map.
ENT
FUNC
(2) If you press
+
, the display changes to confirm insertion of the segment,
and “I N S .” is displayed blinking in the upper display.
(3) If you press
, the display changes to confirm insertion of the segment, and “I N S .”
is displayed blinking in the upper display.
If you press
, the display changes to confirm deletion of the segment, and “D E L .”
is displayed blinking in the upper display.
ENT
(4) If you press
inserted.
while “I N S .” is displayed on the upper display, the segment is
ENT
If you press
deleted.
while “D E L .” is displayed on the upper display, the segment is
(5) The DCP301 returns to the setting display state.
■ Display (inserting segment)
Program No. Segment No.
I N S.
Pattern
tendency
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out
■ Display (deleting segment)
Program No. Segment No.
D E L .
Pattern
tendency
EV1 to EV3 and T1 to T5 all out
• When you insert a segment, a new segment is automatically created at the currently
displayed segment No., and all segment Nos. onward are incremented by one. The
setting of the inserted segment is as follows:
SP setting value: Same value as original segment before the new segment was in serted
Time setting value: 0:10
Events, time events and G.Soak are not set, and the PID set No. is set to 0.
• If you try to insert a segment in a program already containing 30 segments, pressing
ENT
will not insert the segment.
• When you delete a segment, the next segment shifts down to the currently displayed
segment No. and subsequent segment Nos. are decremented by one.
When you delete the last segment, the display changes to “- - - -” indicating that noth-
ing is set.
• Segments cannot be inserted or deleted from currently running (RUN, HOLD, FAST,
END) programs.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
8-2 Copying Programs
The DCP301 can be set for copying programs in the program operation READY mode in the basic display state. If the
DISP
DCP301 is not in the basic display state, press
.
■ Operation
(1) Set the DCP301 to the program operation READY mode.
Set variable parameter L O C to either of 0, 1 or 3, and variable parameter P R T C to 0.
PROG
(2) In the basic display state, press
or
to select the copy source program No.
However, note that the program No. cannot be selected on the console when control-
ling the DCP301 by external switch inputs.
For details, see 6-3 Program Selection (page 6-7).
PROG
(3) If you press
+
, “C O P Y” is displayed on the upper display, and the copy
destination program No. is displayed on the lower display.
(4) If you press or , currently non-set program Nos. are displayed blinking in
order as the copy destination program No.
When there are no non-set program Nos., “- - - -” is displayed on the lower display.
ENT
(5) If you press
, program copy is executed, and the lower display stops blinking. To
repeat the procedure, carry out steps (4) and (5) again.
DISP
(6) To quit program copy, press
.
■ Display
Program No.
C O P Y
Copy destination program No.
Output state of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8. PROGRAM SETUP
8-3 General Reset
A general reset can be executed when the DCP301 is in the READY AUTO mode in the basic display state. If the
DISP
DCP301 is not in the basic display state, press
.
A “general reset” involves the following operations:
• Clearing all program setups for program Nos.1 to 19
• Returning parameter setups to their factory settings
• Changing the mode to the program operation READY AUTO mode
■ Operation
(1) Set the DCP301 to the READY AUTO mode.
Set variable parameter L O C and P R T C to 0.
FUNC
CLR
DISP
(2) If you press
+
+
in the basic display state, the display changes to con-
firm execution of general reset, and “G . R E S” is displayed on the upper display.
ENT
(3) If you press
power ON.
, the general reset is executed, and operation starts from startup at
If you press DISP , general reset is not executed, and the DCP301 returns to the basic
display state.
■ Display
Program No. Segment No.
G .R E S
Pattern
tendency
Output state of events 1 to 3, time events 1 to 5
In the constant-value operation mode, all of the program No., segment No. and profiles displays
are cleared.
• If a RAM backup error occurs when the power is turned ON, the display changes to
confirm general reset without pressing any of the keys on the console, and “G . R E S”
is displayed in the upper display.
ENT
If you press
ated.
, the general reset is executed. Other keys, however, cannot be oper-
• The following setup data items are not returned to their factory settings.
C 0 2, C 0 3: Save setting values.
However, note that if a RAM backup error occurs when the power is
turned ON, C 0 2 and C 0 3 settings become 0.
C 0 4, C 0 5: These are set to 0 when the input 1 range type is set to linear.
C 0 6:
This is set to 1000 when the input 1 range type is set to linear.
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
9-1 Self-diagnostics and Alarm Code Display
Self-diagnostics functions are incorporated into the controller. The table on the following page shows the alarm codes
that are displayed as a result of self-diagnostics.
■ Self-diagnostics at power ON
■ PROM error
An error in the system program stored to PROM has been detected. However, note that
not all PROM errors are detected. Some errors are detected as controller operation errors.
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.
■ Adjustment value error
An error in the analog I/O adjustment data stored to volatile memory has been detected.
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.
■ RAM backup error
An error in the RAM backup function has been detected.
When this error is detected, a general reset is carried out.
An alarm code is not displayed for this error.
■ Board configuration error
An error in the board configuration (combination of different PCBs) has been detected
according to the catalog No. of the controller.
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.
■ Self-diagnostics at each sampling cycle
■ Analog input error
A probable cause of this error is a disconnected analog input. This error is detected when
the analog input is outside the -10.0 to 110.0% range.
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.
■ MFB (motor feedback) input error
Disconnected MFB input or a short-circuit has been detected on 2G output models.
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.
■ Intermittent self-diagnostics during operation
■ Program error
An error in the program setup data stored to backup RAM has been detected.
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.
■ Parameter error
An error in the parameter setup data stored to backup RAM has been detected.
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.
■ Low battery voltage error
A drop in the battery voltage for backing up RAM data has been detected.
When the low battery voltage error is detected, the red BAT LED on the console blinks.
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Self-diagnostics only when certain functions are operating
■ MFB (motor feedback) adjustment error
This error is detected when MFB automatic adjustment is not going smoothly on 2G
output models.
The corresponding alarm code is displayed when this error is detected.
To clear this alarm, either execute automatic adjustment again or turn the power OFF
then back ON again.
■ Alarm code display
When an input error or controller error is detected in the basic display state, the alarm
code and regular display are displayed alternately every second on the program No. and
segment No. displays. The table below shows alarm codes and alarm descriptions.
When two or more alarms occur at the same time, the alarm codes are displayed from the
smallest number upwards together with the regular display.
However, note that when setup data C 6 7 has been set to “1”, alarm codes are not dis-
played.
■ Alarm categories
PV range alarm groups: A L 0 1 to A L 1 2
Controller alarm groups: A L 8 1 to A L Q Q, and low battery voltage
(BAT LED on console blinks in case of low battery voltage.)
Remedy
Check input 1
Alarm Code
Alarm Name
Description
A L 0 1
A L 0 2
A L 0 7
A L 0 8
Input 1 over-range
Input 1 has exceeded 110%FS
Input 1 has fallen below -10%FS
RTD line A is disconnected.
Input 1 under-range
Input 1 RTD disconnection A
Input 1 RTD disconnection B
Check line of RTD (resis-
tance temperature detector)
connected to input 1 for
disconnection, and terminal
connections.
RTD line B or lines ABC are
disconnected.
A L 0 q
A L 1 0
Input 1 RTD disconnection C RTD line C is disconnected.
MFB disconnection
MFB (Y, T, G) line(s) is
disconnected.
Check MFB wiring.
A L 1 1
A L 1 2
MFB short-circuit
Y-G line or Y-T-G line is short-
circuited.
Check wiring of MFB switch-
ing relay or motor specifica-
tions.
MFB adjustment impossible
Faulty wiring, motor
incompatibility etc.
Ask for repair.
Ask for repair.
A/D converter has malfunctioned.
Faulty board configuration
A L 7 0
A L 8 1
A L q 6
A/D trouble
Board configuration error
Program error
Check program setup, and
reset damaged data. *1
Damaged program setup data
Check parameter setup, and
reset damaged data. *2
Damaged parameter setup data
A L q 7
A L q 8
A L q q
Parameter error
Adjustment value error
PROM error
Ask for repair.
Damaged analog input/output
adjustment data
Ask for repair.
Damaged system program
*1 A L q 6 goes out even if program setup data other the damaged data is reset.
*2 A L q 7 goes out even if parameter setup data other the damaged data is reset.
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
9-2 Trouble during Key Entry
PROG
■ The program No. does not change by pressing
in basic display state
Cause
Remedy
Program selection by external switch input not
0.
Set all external switch inputs RSW8 to 12 OFF.
The controller is not in the READY mode.
Reset the controller.
The controller is in the constant-value opera-
tion mode.
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.
Key lock is enabled.
■ The program No. does not change by pressing
in the basic display state
Cause
Remedy
Program selection by external switch input not
0
Set all external switch inputs RSW8 to 12 OFF.
The controller is not in the READY mode.
Reset the controller.
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.
The controller is in the constant-value opera-
tion mode.
DISP
Press
.
Entry changeable display state by
in MANUAL mode
Key lock is enabled.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.
RUN/HOLD
■ The controller does not change to RUN mode by pressing
in the basic display
state
Cause
Remedy
Select an already set up program.
The currently selected program in READY
mode has not been set up.
The controller is in the END mode.
Key lock is enabled.
Reset the controller to READY mode.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.
RUN/HOLD
■ The controller does not change to HOLD mode by pressing
in the basic dis-
play state
Cause
Remedy
The controller is in the READY or FAST mode. RUN mode is entered from READY or FAST mode. Press
RUN/HOLD key again.
RUN/HOLD
Reset the controller to READY mode, and press
twice.
The controller is in the END mode.
The controller is in the constant-value opera-
tion mode.
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.
Key lock is enabled.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.
PROG
RUN/HOLD
■ The controller cannot be reset by pressing
+
in the basic display state
“Reset in the program operation mode” refers to switching to the READY mode and
returning to the No.1 segment.
“Reset in the constant-value mode” refers to switching to the READY mode.
Cause
Remedy
RUN/HOLD
The controller is in the READY mode.
Press
to set the controller to the RUN mode. (The
controller can be reset in case of external switch input or
communications even in the READY mode.)
Key lock is enabled.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
PROG
DISP
■ The program is not advanced by pressing
+
in the basic display state
Cause
Remedy
RUN/HOLD
The controller is in the READY mode.
Press
to set the controller to the RUN mode. (The
controller can be reset in case of external switch input
or communications even in the READY mode.)
PROG
RUN/HOLD
Press
+
to set the controller to the READY
The controller is in the END mode.
RUN/HOLD
mode, and press
RUN mode.
again to set the controller to the
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.
The controller is in the constant-value opera-
tion mode.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.
Key lock is enabled.
FUNC
■ The controller does not change to FAST mode by pressing
+
in the basic
display state
Cause
Remedy
to set the controller to the RUN mode. (The
RUN/HOLD
The controller is in the READY mode.
Press
controller can be reset in case of external switch input
or communications even in the READY mode.)
PROG
RUN/HOLD
Press
+
to set the controller to the READY
The controller is in the END mode.
RUN/HOLD
mode, and press
RUN mode.
again to set the controller to the
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.
The controller is in the constant-value opera-
tion mode.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.
Key lock is enabled.
A/M
■ The controller does not change to MANUAL mode by pressing
in the basic
display state
Cause
Remedy
ON-OFF control is being carried out by 0D
and 6D outputs.
Set PID set P setting in use to other than 0.0 and switch
to PID control from ON-OFF control.
3-position-proportional control is selected by
3D output.
Set setup data C 4 5 setting to 0 and switch to PID
control from 3-position-proportional control.
Key lock is enabled.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.
A/M
■ The controller does not change to AUTO mode by pressing
in the basic dis-
play state
Cause
Key lock is enabled.
Remedy
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.
AT
■ Auto-tuning (AT) is not started by pressing
in the basic display state
Cause
Remedy
RUN/HOLD
A/M
The controller is in the READY mode.
The controller is in the MANUAL mode.
Input 1 over-range
Press
Press
to set the controller to the RUN mode.
to set the controller to the AUTO mode.
Correctly wire input 1 to correct input state.
Set variable parameter A T setting to other than 0.
Set setup data C 1 8 setting to 0.
Controller set not to execute AT.
The controller is set to programmer functions
by 5G output.
This is a heat/cool model.
Key lock is enabled.
AT cannot be executed by 3D and 5K outputs.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
AT
■ Auto-tuning (AT) is not canceled by pressing
in the basic display state
Cause
Remedy
Key lock is enabled.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 to 2.
PARA
■ Setting group other than “P A R A” is not displayed by pressing
by selecting
the setting group in parameter set state
Cause
Key lock is enabled.
Remedy
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0, 1 or 3.
PARA
■ Setting group other than “S E T” is not displayed by pressing
by selecting the
setting group in parameter set state
Cause
Key lock is enabled.
Remedy
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0 or 3.
ENT
■ The controller does not enter the setting entry state by pressing
in the param-
eter setup state
Cause
Remedy
“– – – –” is displayed on the lower display.
This cannot be displayed nor set. This item sometimes
can be displayed or set by changing the setting of
related items.
This is a display-only item.
Unchangeable data is displayed on the lower
display.
■ The controller does not change to setup group selection state and setting entry
PARA
state continues by pressing
in parameter setting entry state
Cause
Remedy
PARA
DISP
The controller displays items by
ment.
assign- Press
to return the controller to the basic display
FUNC
PARA
state, and press
+
.
FUNC
PROG
■ The controller does not change to program setup state by pressing
+
in
the basic display state
Cause
Remedy
The controller is in the constant-value opera-
tion mode.
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.
Key lock is enabled.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0, 1 or 3.
ENT
■ The controller does not change to the setting entry state by pressing
in the
basic display state
Cause
Remedy
The program setup cannot be changed.
Set program parameter P R T C setting to 0.
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Items cannot be changed by pressing
in program setup state
Cause
Remedy
The pattern item has not been set.
Set SP and time data.
Programming items are set to “display OFF”.
All setup data C 6 8 to C 7 1 settings are “1”. Set
necessary items to 0.
■ Event items cannot be displayed by repeatedly pressing
in program setup
state
Cause
Remedy
Event type is controller status event.
Set event type (E T 1, E T 2, E T 3) in event configura-
tion date to one of 0 to 11 or 50.
Set setup data C 6 8 setting to 0.
Programming items are set to “display OFF”.
■ Time events cannot be displayed by repeatedly pressing
in program setup
state
Cause
Remedy
Change event configuration data T T setting and assign
Time event is assigned to segment No. event.
to time event.
Select a mode that supports time events (option).
This model does not support time events.
Set setup data C 6 q setting to 0.
Programming items are set to “display OFF”.
■ PID set items cannot be displayed by repeatedly pressing
in program setup
state
Cause
Remedy
PID set auto-switching is set to ON.
Set setup data C 1 1 setting to 0.
The controller is set to programmer function
by 5G output.
Set setup data C 1 8 setting to 0.
3-position control is selected by 3D output.
Set setup data C 4 5 setting in use to 0 and switch to
PID control from 3-position control.
Programming items are set to “display OFF”.
Set setup data C 7 0 setting to 0.
■ G.Soak items cannot be displayed by repeatedly pressing
in program setup
state
Cause
Remedy
Set setup data C 7 0 setting to 0.
Programming items are set to “display OFF”.
■ PV start items, cycle items and pattern link items cannot be displayed by repeat-
edly pressing in program setup state
Cause
Programming items are set to “display OFF”.
Remedy
Set setup data C 7 1 setting to 0.
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
ENT
FUNC
■ Insertion/deletion of segments cannot be confirmed by pressing
+
in pro-
gram setup state
Cause
Remedy
The program setup cannot be changed.
Set program parameter P R T C setting to 0.
The program being set up is being operated
(RUN. HOLD, FAST, END).
Reset the controller.
Not pattern item on programming map
Move to pattern item on programming map.
Pattern item of non-set segment on program-
ming map
Either move to already set up segment, or set up
segment.
FUNC
CLR
■ Program deletion cannot be confirmed by pressing
+
while entering pat-
tern items in program setup state
Cause
Remedy
The program being set up is being operated
(RUN. HOLD, FAST, END).
Reset the controller.
PROG
■ The program cannot be copied by pressing
+
in the basic display state
Cause
Remedy
Reset the controller.
The mode is not the READY mode.
The program of the currently selected pro-
gram No. is not set up.
Select a program No. whose program is already set.
The controller is in the constant-value opera-
tion mode.
Set constant-value operation data M .O D E setting to 0.
The program is protected.
Key lock is enabled.
Set variable parameter P R T C setting to 0.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0, 1 or 3.
FUNC
CLR
DISP
■ General reset is not applied by pressing
+
+
in the basic display state
Cause
Remedy
The mode is not the READY mode.
The mode is the MANUAL mode.
Program is protected.
Reset the controller.
Execute auto operation.
Set variable parameter P R T C setting to 0.
Key lock is enabled.
Set variable parameter L O C setting to 0.
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
9-3 Motor Adjustment is Impossible
There are two ways of wiring a motor to the DCP301: wiring for direct motor rotation and wiring for reverse motor
rotation. When wired for direct motor rotation, the motor rotates in clockwise (CW ) direction when DCP301
output increases. There are two ways of making the motor rotate in the reverse direction (counterclockwise: CCW)
depending on your control requirements (e.g. cooling control):
• By switching the control operating direction on the DCP301 with the motor wired to the DCP301 for direct
motor rotation as it is, or
• By wiring the motor to the DCP301 for reverse motor rotation.
The control operating direction (direct/reverse) can be switched on this controller. If the motor is wired to the control-
ler for direct motor rotation, the DCP301 can be easily set up for control in either direction. This makes it easier to
remedy trouble that may occur during controller operation. For this reason, we recommend wiring the motor to the
DCP301 for direct motor operation.
Wiring for direct motor rotation
DCP301
Wiring for reverse motor rotation
DCP301
11 12 13 14 15 16
11 12 13 14 15 16
24Vac
24Vac
~
~
2
3
1
Y
T
G
2
3
1
Y
T
G
CW open CCW closed
CW open CCW closed
Motor
CW open CCW closed
CW open CCW closed
Motor
CW:
Clock Wise (
)
CCW: Counter Clock Wise (
)
The DCP301 is also provided with a function (A L 1 0 to A L 1 2) for detecting MFB disconnection or short-circuit if
the motor has been wired to the controller in the wrong way.
By this function, the DCP301 judges reverse direction wiring in the same way as direct direction wiring, and does not
generate an alarm. If the setting of variable parameter M .-C is left at the factory setting (“0”), motor operation is
continued.
The following tables summarize the phenomena that occur according to how the motor and DCP301 are wired when
the motor is automatically adjusted (variable parameter M .-A T setting 1 is input). Motor rotation is started from the
fully closed position (motor is turned as far as possible CCW).
The values displayed in the lower display in the tables are only examples. Alarms are displayed after the motor fully
closes or fully opens.
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Normal wiring for direct motor rotation
Upper Display
Lit LEDs
Lower Display
Motor Action
Remarks
Readout decreases
from 1000 to 500 and
stabilizes.
Readout increases
from 500 to 9500 and
stabilizes.
If the motor rotates CCW
when OT2 lights, motor
terminals 1 and 2 are
wired for direct rotation.
C A .C L
OT2
CCW
↓
C A .O P
OT1
CW
■ Normal wiring for reverse motor rotation
Upper Display
Lit LEDs
Lower Display
Motor Action
Remarks
Readout decreases
from 9000 to 500 and
stabilizes.
Readout increases
from 500 to 9500 and
stabilizes.
If the motor rotates CW
when 1↔ 2 and G ↔ Y
are reversed and OT2
lights, motor terminals 1
and 2 are wired for
C A .C L
OT2
CW
↓
C A .O P
OT1
CCW
reverse rotation.
■ Alarm display caused by wrong wiring and causes
Upper Display Lit LEDs
Lower Display
Motor Action Alarm Display
Cause
G↔ Y
Display increases and
stabilizes.
Display decreases and
stabilizes.
C A .C L
↓
C A .O P
OT2
OT1
CCW
CW
A L 1 2
reversed
Display decreases and
stabilizes.
Display stabilizes at
9999.
T↔ G
reversed
C A .C L
↓
C A .O P
OT2
OT1
CCW
CW
A L 1 2
Display stabilizes at
9999.
T↔ Y
reversed
C A .C L
OT2
CCW
A L 1 1
A L 1 2
Display increases and
stabilizes.
Display decreases and
stabilizes.
1↔ 2
reversed
C A .C L
↓
C A .O P
OT2
OT1
CW
A L 1 2
CCW
Display stabilizes at
9999.
1↔ 2
reversed,
C A .C L
OT2
CW
A L 1 1
A L 1 2
T↔ G
reversed
Display decreases and
stabilizes.
Display stabilizes at
9999.
1↔ 2
reversed,
T↔ Y
reversed
C A .C L
↓
C A .O P
OT2
OT1
CW
A L 1 2
CCW
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
9-4 Replacing the Battery
CAUTION
Before replacing the battery, be sure to turn the power OFF. Failure to do
so might cause electric shock.
Do not touch internal components immediately after turning the power OFF
to replace the battery. Doing so might cause burns.
• Do not insert the battery with the polarities (+,-) reversed.
• Do not use damaged (broken battery skin, leaking battery fluid) batteries.
• Do not throw batteries into fires, or charge, short-circuit, disassemble or
heat batteries.
• Store batteries in low-temperature, dry locations.
Failure to observe the above cautions may cause batteries to emit heat or
split, or battery fluid to lead.
Store batteries out of the reach of small children.
Batteries are small and are easy to swallow. If a child swallows a battery,
consult a physician immediately.
Return used batteries to Honeywell sales/service office or your dealer. When
disposing of used batteries at the user site, observe local bylaws.
Handling Precautions
• Before handling components inside the controller, touch a grounded metal part
to remove any static electricity from the body. Static electricity may cause dam-
age to controller components.
• Batteries left in storage for a long time discharge electricity, reducing their ser-
vice life. Purchase new batteries as required.
The parameter setups and program setups on the DCP301 are stored to battery backed up memory (RAM). So, stored
setups are held in memory even if the controller is turned OFF.
However, when battery voltage becomes low, stored setups are no longer held in memory when the controller is
turned OFF.
■ BAT LED blinking
When low battery voltage is detected, the BAT LED on the console blinks. The voltage
level for detection of low battery voltage is set higher than the required voltage level for
holding stored setups in memory.
Accordingly, as soon as the BAT LED starts blinking, stored setups can still be held in
memory. However, if the controller is turned back ON after being left for a long time and
the BAT LED blinks, setups stored to memory may be damaged.
■ Items to prepare
• Phillips head screwdriver
• New lithium battery:
Model No. 81446431-001
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Replacement procedure
Handling Precautions
• Replace with the lithium battery set (model No.: 81446431-001). The lithium
battery set can be ordered from Yamatake Corporation.
• When removing or mounting the RAM board or battery connectors, do not use
metallic tools. Doing so might short-circuit electrical circuits.
• While the battery is removed for battery replacement, the capacitor on the RAM
board backs up the contents of memory.
As this capacitor is charged, make sure that the controller is left ON for at least
1h before replacing the battery. Insert the new battery on the RAM board within
24h of turning the controller OFF.
When the BAT LED starts blinking, follow the procedure below to replace the battery.
(1) Leave the controller turned ON for at least 1h.
(2) Turn the power OFF.
ENT
(3) Remove the key cover from the console, and fully loosen the lock screw under
a Phillips screwdriver.
with
>> The body comes out towards you.
Comes out towards you.
Lock screw
Key cover
(4) Before handling components inside the controller, touch a grounded metal part to
remove any static electricity from the body.
(5) Pull the body out towards you to remove from the case.
>> You should be able to see the button-shaped battery on the left facing the body.
Battery
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
(6) Place the body on its save on a desk or flat surface so that the side on which the
battery is installed is facing up.
(7) Remove the battery from its gray holder.
(8) Remove the RAM board (approx. 3cm x 8cm) with the battery still connected to the
board.
The RAM board is connected to the base board by two connectors.
Handling Precautions
When placing the RAM board on the desk, make sure that the solder surface of
the board is face down. If the component mounting surface is placed face down,
the components may become damaged.
Connector
RAM board
(approx. 3cm x 8cm)
Connector
(9) Remove the battery connector from the RAM board.
Connector
(
(
10) Connect the connector of the new battery to the RAM board making sure that it is
inserted the correct direction.
11) Mount the RAM Board making sure that it is mounted in the correct direction. Do
not insert the battery cable under the RAM board.
OK
No good
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9. TROUBLESHOOTING
(
12) Fit the battery into the gray holder so that the battery cable is above the RAM board.
Gray holder
(
13) Insert the body into the case.
Do not exert excessive force if the body cannot easily fit into the case. Also, make
sure that the boards mounted on the body are not loose or twisted.
(
(
14) Tighten the lock screw while slightly pushing in the controller’s console. Take care
not to overtighten the screw.
15) Turn the controller ON, and make sure that the BAT LED is out.
• The following serves as a general guideline for when to replace the battery:
Note
About 3 years when using the controller under standard operating conditions (operat-
ing temperature: 23±2°C) with the controller ON
About 10 years when using the controller under standard operating conditions (operat-
ing temperature: 23±2°C) with the controller OFF
Using the controller in a higher operating temperature will shorten its service life.
• Setups are held in memory even if the BAT LED is blinking.
• The controller operates in one of two ways when memory contents are damaged.
(1) “G .R E S” is displayed when the controller is turned ON and regular operation is
not started.
ENT
(If this happens, press
to execute a general reset. This restores parameter set-
ups to factory settings and clears the program setup.)
(2) Regular operation is started when the controller is turned ON, and one or both of
alarm codes A L q 6 and/or A L q 7 is displayed.
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS
10-1 Specifications
Item
Specification
Program Number of programs
Number of segments
Segment setting system
Segment time
Basic time accuracy
Events (3)
19
30 per program
RAMP-X system: Set by set points (SP) and time.
0 to 99h 59min, or 0 to 99min 59s (time unit selectable)
±0.01% (0.1s delay when segment time setting=0)
Set operating point.
Time events (5)
PID set No.
Set ON and OFF times.
Set 0 to 8 (Set 0 for continuation of previous segment) (Set 0 to 4 on heat/cool models.)
Sets G.Soak width 0 to 1000U.
G.Soak
PV start
Sets program ON/OFF.
Cycle
Sets program count 0 to 9999.
Pattern link
Sets program No.0 to 19 (0: no link)
Tag
Sets 8 alphanumerics for each program (not displayed on controller)
Thermocouple, resistance temperature detector, dc voltage, dc current multi-range
(See pages 2-8 and 2-9.)
Input
Input type
Input readout accuracy
±0.1%FS±1U (varies according to standard conditions, display value conversion and
range)
• At -100°C max. of K and T thermocouples: ±1°C1U
• At 260°C max. of B thermocouple:
At 260 to 800°C:
At 800 to 1800°C:
±4%FS±1U
±0.4%FS±1U
±0.2%FS±1U
• At 100°C max. of R and S thermocouples: ±0.2%FS±1U
At 100 to 1600°C: ±0.15%FS±1U
• At 300°C max. of PR40-20 thermocouple: ±2.5%FS±1U
At 300 to 800°C:
At 800 to 1900°C:
• Golden iron chromel thermocouple:
±1.5%FS±1U
±0.5%FS±1U
±1.5K±1U
• 2-digit range past decimal point by resistance thermometer detector input:
±0.15%±1U
• At 0 to 10mV range:
±0.15%FS±1U
• At -100°C max. of DIN U thermocouple:
±2°C±1U
At -100 to 0°C:
±1°C±1U
• At -100°C max. of DIN L thermocouple: ±1.5°C±1U
0.1s
Input sampling cycle
Input bias current
Thermocouple, dc voltage input: ±1.3µA max. (at peak value, under standard conditions)
At 1V min. range: 3µA max.
Input impedance
Measuring current
Influence of wiring resis-
tance
dc current input:
50Ω ±10% (under operating conditions)
RTD input: 1.04mA ±0.02mA, current flow from terminal A (under operating conditions)
Thermocouple,
Changes in readout value at wiring resistance of 250Ω at both
ends are as follows by input conversion:
dc voltage input:
• 0 to 10mV, -10 to 10mV: Within 35µV
• 0 to 100mV:
Within 60µV
• Other:
Within 750µV
RTD input:
±0.01%FS max. in wiring resistance range 0 to 10Ω
Range of F01, F33, F38, P01, P33 and P38: ±0.02%FS/Ω max.
Allowable wiring resistance is 85Ω max. (including Zener barrier
resistance. When Zener barrier is used, this applies only to
ranges other than F01, F33, F38, P01, P33 and P38. Note that
site adjustment is required.)
Allowable parallel resistance Thermocouple disconnection detection allowable parallel resistance: 1MΩ min.
Max. allowable input
Thermocouple, dc voltage input: -5 to +15Vdc
dc current input: 50mAdc, 2.5Vdc
Burnout
Upscale and downscale can be internally selected. (dc current input and dc voltage
input of 1V or more are only downscaled.)
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
110%FS min.: Upscaled
Input
Over-range detection
threshold
-10%FS max.: Downscaled (Note that F50 range is not downscaled. Lower readout
limit of B18 range is 20°C, 68°F.)
Cold junction compensa-
tion accuracy
±0.5°C (under standard conditions)
Influence of surrounding
temperature on cold
junction compensation
Cold junction compensa-
tion system
±0.2°C (at 0 to 50°C range)
Internal/external (0°C only) compensation selectable
Scaling
-1999 to 9999U (settable at dc voltage and dc current ranges. Reverse scaling and
decimal point repositioning possible)
Square root extraction
Linearization table approximation
Input bias
Dropout 0.1 to 10.0%, Possible by dc current and voltage ranges
12 (both line ends fixed, 11 points variable)
-1000 to 1000U variable
Digital filter
0.0 to 120.0s variable (filter OFF at 0.0)
Number of inputs
Types of connectable
outputs
12
External
Switch
(RSW)
Input
Dry contacts (relay contact) and open-collector (current sink to ground)
Terminal voltage (open)
10.4 to 12.6V (under operating conditions) across common terminal (terminal 25 ) and
each input terminal
Terminal current (short-
circuit)
5.0 to 6.6mA across each terminal (under operating conditions)
Allowable contact resistance
(dry contact)
ON: 700Ω max. (under operating conditions)
OFF: 10kΩ min. (under operating conditions)
3V max. (under operating conditions)
Residual current (allowable
open-collector ON)
Leakage current (allowable
open-collector OFF)
Parallel connection to
other instruments
0.1mA max. (under operating conditions)
Can be connected to DCP301/302 series.
Assignments (fixed)
Assignments (variable)
Input sampling cycle
ON detection min. hold time
Upper display
RUN, HOLD, RESET, ADV, program No.
FAST, PV start, AT, AUTO/MANUAL, G.Soak cancel, reverse/direct action
0.1s
0.2s (program No. 0.4s)
Green 4-digit, 7-segment LED
Indication
/Program-
mer
This normally displays PV values. Item codes are displayed in parameter setup.
Orange 4-digit, 7-segment LED
Lower display
This normally displays SP values. Setting values are displayed in parameter setup.
Green 2-digit, 7-segment LED
Program No. display
Segment No. display
This normally displays program No.
Green 2-digit, 7-segment LED
This normally displays segment No. Item Nos. are displayed in parameter setup, and
alarm No. is displayed when alarm occurs.
6 orange LEDs
Profile display
Status displays
Displays program pattern rise, soak and fall tendencies.
22 round LEDs
Modes:
RUN, HLD, MAN, PRG (green)
Display details: PV, SP, OUT, TM, CYC (green)
Battery voltage: BAT (red) (blinks at low voltage)
Status:
AT, OT1, OT2, OT3 (orange)
Events:
EV1, EV2, EV3, T1, T2, T3, T4, T5 (orange)
Operation keys
13 rubber keys
Loader connector port
1 (dedicated cable with stereo miniplugs)
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
READY:
RUN:
Ready to run program (control stop/program No. selectable)
Mode
Program operation mode
Program run
HOLD:
FAST:
END:
Program hold
Program fast-forward
Program end
AUTO:
Automatic operation
MANUAL: Manual operation (output controlled on console)
Constant-value operation
mode
READY:
RUN:
Ready to run program (control stop)
Program run
AUTO:
Automatic operation
MANUAL: Manual operation (output controlled on console)
PID control
Control
Proportional band (P)
0.0 to 999.9% (0D, 6D output), ON-OFF control by 0.0
0.1 to 999.9% (2G, 5G, 3D, 5K output)
0 to 3600s, PD control by 0
Rate time (I)
Reset time (D)
MV limit
0 to 1200s, PI control by 0
Lower limit:
-10.0 to upper limit %
Upper limit: Lower limit to 110.0%
0.0 to 100.0%
Manual reset
Number of PID sets
8 sets for program operation + 1 set for constant-value
operation
PID set selection
Segment designation/automatic zone selection can be
switched by program operation
MV change limit
Auto-tuning
0.0 to 10.0%/0.01s, no limit by 0.0
Automatic setting of PID value by limit cycle system +
Neuro & Fuzzy (2 degrees of freedom PID) and Smart
systems (executable by 0D, 2G, 5G and 6D outputs)
ON-OFF control differential 0 to 1000U (settable by 0D and 6D outputs)
Position-proportional dead 0.5 to 25.0% (settable by 2G output)
zone
Heat/cool dead zone
Deviation lower limit
Deviation upper limit
Deviation lower limit
hysteresis
-100.0 to 50.0% (settable by 3D and 5K outputs)
0 to 1000U (settable when 3-position control is selected
by 3D output)
3-position control
Deviation upper limit
hysteresis
Reverse/direct action
switching
Switchable
(0D, 2G, 5G, 6D outputs)
Programmer function
Switching
MV output can be switched to SP output (5G output).
Scaling
Supported
1/10000
Output resolution
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Control
Output
Auxiliary output
Type
PV, SP, deviation, MV, MFB
Scaling
Supported
Output resolution
Relay contact
output
1/10000
0D output 1
Contact type:
Contact rating:
1a1b
3D outputs 1, 2
5A (30Vdc, resistive load)
5A (120Vac, resistive load)
4A (240Vdc, resistive load)
Allowable contact voltage:250Vac, resistive load
125Vdc, resistive load
Max. switching power:
150W, resistive load
960VA, resistive load
Life:
100,000 operations
(resistive load at contact rating, frequency:
30 operations/minute)
Min. switching voltage:
Min. switching current:
Output resolution:
5V
100mA
1/1000
Time-proportional cycle: 5 to 120s
2G output 1
M/M drive relay
Contact type:
1a (2 circuits)
Contact rating:
2.5A (30Vdc, L/R=0.7ms)
4A (120Vac, cosø=0.4)
2A (240Vac, cosø=0.4)
Allowable contact voltage:250Vac, cosø=0.4
125Vdc, L/R=0.7ms
Max. switching power:
Life:
75W (L/R=0.7ms)
480VA (cosø=0.4)
100,000 operations
(cosø=0.4 at contact rating, frequency: 30
operations/minute)
5V
Min. switching voltage:
Min. switching current:
100mA
MFB (motor feedback) input range:
100 to 2500Ω
Control at MFB (motor feedback) disconnection:
ON/OFF for continuation of operation
according to MFB estimated position can
be selected.
5G output 1
Current output
(4 to 20mA)
Output current:
4 to 20/0 to 20mAdc
5K outputs 1, 2
Auxiliary outputs 1, 2
Allowable load resistance:600Ω max. (under operating conditions)
Output accuracy:
±0.1%FS max. (under standard condi-
tions)
±0.5%FS at output 5% or less of 0 to
20mA output
Output resolution:
1/10000
Inrush current:
25mA max. for 50ms max. (at 250Ω load)
Max. output current:
Min. output current:
Output updating cycle:
Open terminal voltage:
22.0mAdc
0.0mAdc
0.1s
25V max. (output 1)
18V max. (output 2, auxiliary outputs 1, 2)
Allowable load resistance:600Ω max. (under operating conditions)
Inrush current: 25mA max. for 50ms max. (at 250Ω load)
Load current adjustment: 2 to 22mA variable
6D output 1
Voltage output
5K outputs 1, 2
(when current output
is switched to
Open terminal voltage:
25V max. (output 2 of 5K output)
voltage output)
18V max. (output 2 of 5K output)
OFF leakage current:
Output response time:
100µA max.
At ON-OFF 600Ω load: 0.5ms max.
At OFF-ON 600Ω load: 1.0ms max.
1/1000
Output resolution:
Time-proportional cycle: 1 to 60s variable
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Event/
Time
Event
Output
Events 1, 2
Relay contact
output
Contact type:
Contact rating:
Life:
1a
1A (240Vac/30Vdc, resistive load)
100,000 operations (at rating)
Min. switching voltage, current:
10V, 10mA
1a1b
Event 3
Relay contact
output
Contact type:
Contact rating:
Life:
2A (240Vac/30Vdc, resistive load)
100,000 operations (at rating)
Min. switching voltage, current:
10V, 10mA
External supply voltage: 10 to 29Vdc
Time events 1 to 5
Open-collector
output
Max. load current:
OFF leakage current:
ON residual voltage:
PV type events:
70mA/load
0.1mA
1.6V max.
Event 1 to 3 settings
Event type
PV, deviation, absolute value
deviation, SP, MV, MFB
Controller status events: RUN+HOLD+FAST+END, READY,
RUN, HOLD, FAST, END, G.Soak
standby, MANUAL, auto-tuning
executing, constant-value operation,
MFB estimated position control, sum
of all alarms, PV range alarm,
controller alarms, low battery voltage,
setting on console, ADV
Time events
ON/OFF selectable
Event standby
0 to 200U (event types PV, deviation, absolute value deviation
or SP)
Event hysteresis
0.0 to 20.0% (event types MV or MFB)
0 to 3600s
Event ON delay
Time events, segment No. events
RS-485
Time event 1 to 5 settings Time event type
Commu- Communications system
nications
Communications
standard
Multidrop (DCP301 provided with only slave node functionality)
1 to 31 units max.
Network
Half duplex
Data flow
Start-stop synchronization
Balanced (differential)
Synchronization
Transmission
system
Interface system
Bit serial
Data line
5 transmit/receive lines (3-wire connection also possible)
4800, 9600bps
Signal line
Transmission speed
Transmission
distance
500m max. (total)
Conforming to RS-485
Other
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Display characters
11bits/character
Char. bit count
Format
1 start bit, even parity, 1 stop bit; or 1 start bit, no parity, and 2 stop
bits
8bits
Data length
Isolation
All inputs and outputs are completely isolated.
RS-485 communications can be performed by connecting to a computer equipped with an RS-485 interface.
Memory backup
Memory
Battery life
Battery backed-up RAM
Controller power OFF Approx. 3 years under standard conditions
General
Specifica-
tions
Controller power ON
Approx. 10 years under standard conditions
Rated power voltage
Power consumption
Power ON rush current
90 to 264Vac, 50/60Hz
30VA max.
15A max., 10ms (under operating conditions)
Handling Precautions
When starting up a number of DCP31s simultaneously, ensure ample power is supplied
or stagger startup times. Otherwise, the controllers may not start normally due to inrush
current induced-voltage drop. Voltage must stabilize within 2s after power ON.
Reset time:
15s max. (time until normal operation possible under normal operating
conditions)
Power ON operation
20ms max. (under operating conditions)
Allowable transient power
loss
Min. 20MΩ across power terminal (1) or (2) and ground terminal (3) (using a 500Vac
megger)
Insulation resistance
1500Vac 50/60Hz for 1min across power terminal and ground terminal
1500Vac 50/60Hz for 1min across relay output and ground terminal
500Vac 50/60Hz for 1min across non-power terminal and ground terminal
500Vac 50/60Hz for 1min across isolated terminals
Dielectric strength
Standard conditions
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Rated power voltage
Power frequency
Vibration resistance
Impact resistance
Mounting angle
23 2°C
60 5%RH
105Vac 1%
50 1Hz or 60 1Hz
0m/s2
0m/s2
Reference plane (vertical) 3°
2000m max.
Altitude
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature
range
0 to 50°C (temperature at case bottom when closely mounted)
10 to 90%RH (no condensation)
90 to 264Vac
Ambient humidity range
Rated power voltage
Power frequency
Vibration resistance
Impact resistance
Mounting angle
50 2Hz or 60 2Hz
0 to 1.96m/s2
0 to 9.80m/s2
Reference plane (vertical) 10°
Permanently connected type controller, indoor installation, panel-mounted
EN61010-1, EN50081-2, EN50082-2 (CE statement), EN61326
Category II (IEC664-1, EN61010-1)
Installation mode
Applicable standards
Installation category
Pollution degree
2
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Specification
Transport/storage
Specifica- conditions
tions
Ambient temperature
range
Ambient humidity range 10 to 95%RH (no condensation)
-20 to +70°C
General
0 to 4.90m/s2 (10 to 60 Hz for 2h each in X, Y and Z direc-
Vibration resistance
tions)
Impact resistance
Package drop test
Rated
0 to 490m/s2 (3 times vertically)
Drop height: 60cm (1 angle, 3 edges and 6 planes; free fall)
IEC127
Fuse
Cutoff speed
Delayed operation type (T)
Rated voltage
Rated current
250V
1A
M3.5 self-tapping screw
0.78 to 0.98N•m
Terminal screw
Terminal screws tightening
torque
Mask: Multilon
Case: Polycarbonate
Case: Light gray (Munsell 2.5Y7.5/1)
Mask/case materials
Mask/case color
Installation
Mask: Dark gray (Munsell 5Y3.5/1)
Specially designed mounting bracket
Approx. 900g
Mass
I Accessories/option list
Item
Model No.
Q’ty
Standard accessories Unit indicating label
Mounting bracket
N-3132
81405411-001
EN1I-6197
1
1 set (2 brackets)
1
User’s Manual
Options
(sold separately)
Hard dust-proof cover set
Soft dust-proof cover set
Terminal cover set
81446083-001
81446087-001
81446084-001
81446431-001
—
—
—
—
Lithium battery set
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS
10-2 External Dimensions
Unit: mm
(18)
15
159.5
137
96
A
B
A
B
A-A
B-B
37
78.4
10-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10. SPECIFICATIONS
I Soft dust-proof cover set (sold separately)
Unit: mm
(transparent silicon rubber)
Model No.: 81446087-001
98
15.5
12.5
2.7
86
I Hard dust-proof cover set (sold separately)
(transparent polycarbonate)
Model No.: 81446083-001
Packing
16
6
4
106
8
96.6
4.7
I Terminal cover set (sold separately)
(gray non-flammable, heat-resistant PVC)
Model No.: 81446084-001
Can be attached to either of
90
standard or add-on terminal base.
5-3.6 hole
45
17
R1.8
10-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
This chapter covers the field calibrations procedures for the inputs, outputs and various functions of the DCP301 and
DCP302 controller after shipment from the factory. When calibration is made in the field, the original factory data is
erased, and so the specified input/output accuracies of the controller cannot be assured. This manual is for users who
are conversant with DCP301 and DCP302 use and operation.
■ Precautions before calibration
Apply power and allow the controller to warm up for 2 hours before you calibrate the
DCP301 and DCP302. Confirm that the test equipment needed for calibration has stabi-
lized.
Factory calibration has been made at a stable temperature of 23.0°C (±2°C). Calibrate
the DCP301 and DCP302 in this range, and where there are no significant fluctuations in
air temperature.
If calibration equipment of a lower grade than specified below is used, calibration
results may be unsatisfactory.
■ Equipment needed
(1) Standard input source with ±0.02% accuracy (having more than 5 effective digits
and capable of generating both voltage and current outputs)
(2) Decade resistance box with ±0.02% accuracy (having a range of 10 to 500Ω with a
resolution of more than 0.01Ω)
(3) Digital ammeter with ±0.02% accuracy (measurable in the range of 4 to 20mA with
assured resolution of more than 0.01mA)
(4) Thermometer with ±0.1°C accuracy (resolution of more than 0.1°C)
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
11-1 Quick Reference Table for Calibration Items
DCP301 and DCP302 controllers are numbered using the following format. Format items may require different cal-
ibration procedures, as shown in Table 11-1.
Model number: DCP30 * * * * ES * * *
(1) Basic Model Number
(2) Output Number
(3) PV Input Number
(4) Option1 Number
(5) Option2 Number
Table 11-1. Calibration Items for Each Model
Output and Option Model Number
Output:5G, 6D
Option1:00 Option1:01 Option1:02 Option1:00 Option1:01 Option1:02 Option1:00 Option1:01 Option1:00 Option1:01
Basic
Model:
DCP301
Model
Option2:
1, 2
Output:0D
Output:2G, 3D
Output:5K
Calibration
& Test Item
Key Test
0 Function
Test
Indicator Test
DI Test(1 to 4)
DI Test(5 to 12)
DO Control Output Ch1 Test
DO Control Output Ch2 Test
DO Control Output Ch3 Test
DO Test(1 to 3:Event)
DO Test(4 to 8:Time Event)
Gain No.0 to 12
1 PV Input
Calibration
Gain No.16 to 20
2 CJ Sensor
Calibration
4 Current
Output
Output Ch1
Output Ch2
Output Ch3
Calibration
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
Table 11-2. Item and Sub Item Table for Calibration
Item
Sub Item
Description
Item change code
Key test
Upper Display Shows
Lower Display Shows
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
0.0.0.0.etc.
AdJS
Display test
Digital input test
Output test (control)
Output test (digital output)
1
2
0
1
2
3
Item change code
Gain No.
PV input 0%
PV input 100%
1.0.1.1.
2.0.2.2.
Item change code
CJ input 0%
CJ count
AdJS
Previous adjustment
value
0
1
2
3
CJ temperature
Item change code
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
4.0.4.4.
AdJS
OUT ch1 4mA output
OUT ch1 20mA output
OUT ch2 4mA output
OUT ch2 20mA output
OUT ch3 4mA output
OUT ch3 20mA output
Previous adjustment
value
Notes: 1. Items No. is shown on the PROG display.
2. Sub item No. is shown on the SEG display.
3. Item 0: Function check item
4. Items 1, 2 and 6 : Calibration items
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
While pressing FUNC , press
and
simultaneously.
ENT
ENTER
ENTER
&
&
PROG
SEG
PROG
SEG
Function test
PV input
calibration item
0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
0.0.0.0.
1.0.1.1.
*
*
AdJS
AdJS
SETUP
SETUP
PROG
SEG
PROG
SEG
Key test
Gain No. selection
Key ON/OFF
Key ON/OFF
SETUP
0 1 0 1
0 0 0 1
00000
*
AdJS
SETUP
PROG
SEG
PROG
SEG
Current input
count No.
Display test
Zero input count
ON/OFF of display
ON/OFF of display
0 1 0 2
Current count No.
stored
After stabilized,
ENTER
SETUP
press
.
SETUP
PROG
SEG
PROG
SEG
Current input
count No.
DI test
Span input count
DI ON/OFF
0 0 0 3
0 0 0 3
Current count No.
stored
After stabilized,
ENTER
SETUP
press
.
SETUP
PROG
SEG
Input of Control
output ON/OFF
Control output test
Relay Voltage pulse
0 0 0 4
SETUP
PROG
SEG
Input of DO
ON/OFF
Do output test
0 0 0 5
SETUP
Notes: *; 1. This display shows the digits shown in the previous indication.
2. If wrong key operation is made when moving from one to another item, the display is returned
to the initial status of calibration mode. But, the mode is still in the calibration mode.
Figure 11-1. Calibration Flowchart (1/2)
11-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
ENTER
&
PROG
SEG
PROG
SEG
C/J sensor
calibration item
Current item
calibration item
0 4 0 0
0 2 0 0
2.0.2.2.
4.0.4.4.
*
*
AdJS
AdJS
SETUP
SETUP
PROG
SEG
PROG
SEG
CJ zero input count
After stabilized,
Current output
count value
Current input
count No.
OUT CH1
4mA count
0 2 0 1
0 4 0 1
Current count No.
stored
Current count
value stored
press ENTER
.
ENTER
&
SETUP
SETUP
PROG
SEG
PROG
SEG
CJ count
Current output
count value
OUT CH1
20mA count
Current count
0 2 0 2
0 4 0 2
ENTER
&
Current count
stored
Current count
value stored
ENTER
&
SETUP
SETUP
PROG
SEG
PROG
SEG
Current input
resistance
Current output
count value
CJ temperature
OUT CH3
20mA count
0 4 0 6
0 2 0 3
ENTER
Current resistance
stored
Current count
value stored
&
ENTER
&
SETUP
Figure 11-1. Calibration Flowchart (2/2)
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
11-2 Calibration Procedures
■ Enter calibration mode
(1) Release keylock. (PARA LoC=0 and PrtC=0)
(2) Press DISP key to permit ordinary indication condition.
Change to READY (RUN and HLD are off) and AUTO (MAN off) modes.
The following LEDs will illuminate after the above operations.
RUN LED is OFF
HLD LED is OFF
MAN LED is OFF
PROG Display
(Program No. Display)
SEG Display
(Segment No. Display)
PROG
SEG
■PV
■SP
■OUT
■TM
■CYC
■CH1
■CH2
Upper Display
Lower Display
■RUN
■HLD
■MAN
■PRG
PROFILE
■BAT ■AT ■OT1 ■OT2 ■OT3
■EV1 ■EV2 ■EV3 ■T1
PROG
■T2
■T3
■T4
■T5
DISP
RUN/HOLD
FUNC
A/M
AT
PARA
CLR
LOADER
ENT
Figure 11-2.
(3) To enter calibration mode, hold down the FUNC key, and press ENT key and ↓
key simultaneously.
The display will show the symbols described in Figure 11-3. If the indication is dif-
ferent, repeat the above procedure after pushing DISP key to refresh the display.
(4) To select individual calibration items, press ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys to select the item
by scrolling, then PARA key, and ENT key.
The order of calibration items is described in Table 11-2.
00 00
PROG
SEG
■PV
■SP
■OUT
■TM
■CYC
■CH1
■CH2
0.0.0.0.
A.d.J.S.
■RUN
■HLD
■MAN
■PRG
PROFILE
■BAT ■AT ■OT1 ■OT2 ■OT3
■EV1 ■EV2 ■EV3 ■T1
PROG
■T2
■T3
■T4
■T5
DISP
RUN/HOLD
FUNC
A/M
AT
PARA
CLR
LOADER
ENT
Figure 11-3.
11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
■ Function test
Press ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys to show (0.0.0.0) on upper display, then press ENT key.
■Key test (00-01)
Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-01).
When you press each key, the data appears in the upper display (shown in Table 11-3).
Table 11-3. Upper Display
Key
Data
Key
Data
PROG
RUN/HOLD
0.0.4.0.
4.0.0.0.
FUNC
CLR
A/M
AT
0.0.2.0.
0.0.0.4.
0.0.0.8.
0.8.0.0.
0.0.0.1.
0.1.0.0.
0.2.0.0.
0.0.1.0.
1.0.0.0.
ENT
HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
1. When you press DISP key, calibration mode will be exited.
2. When you press PARA key, the next calibration menu will be entered
(Display test).
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
■Display test (00-02)
Press PARA key until the display test starts.
Then, each 7-segment LED, LED indicators and LCD illuminates at every 0.5 sec.
This is to check if each LED/LCD illuminates.
■Digital input test (00-03)
Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-03).
When you turn on or off each remote switch, the upper display will show the data
described in Table 11-4.
Table 11-4. DI
DI
(21) (22) (23) (24) (41) (42) (43) (44) (45) (46) (47) (48)
Terminal
Number
Upper
Display
(25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25) (25)
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
0.0.0.0.
0.0.0.1.
0.0.0.2.
0.0.0.4.
0.0.0.8.
0.0.1.0.
0.0.2.0.
0.0.4.0.
0.0.8.0.
0.1.0.0.
0.2.0.0.
0.4.0.0.
0.8.0.0.
Notes: 1. “ON” means to short the terminals by a jumper.
2. “—” means to open the terminals.
Example:
(21)
= Short (21) and (25) terminals.
(25)
ON
11-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
■Digital output test for control output (00-04)
Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-04).
When the digit of upper display is changed by ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys, the state of voltage
pulse or relay control output is changed as shown in Table 11-5.
Since the 6D hardware is of voltage pulse output (0D and 2G hardware is of relay) spec-
ification, the ON/OFF check must be performed in meeting with the specification.
Table 11-5.
Upper Display
State
0.0.0.0.
All OFF
6D, 0D, 2G output
CH1 ON
0.0.0.1.
0.0.0.2.
0.0.0.4.
6D, 2G output
CH2 ON
6D output
CH3 ON
■Digital output test for event (00-05)
Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (00-05).
Table 11-6. DO
DO
Terminal
Number
(4) (6) (8) (49) (50) (51) (52) (53)
Upper
Display
(5) (7) (9) (55) (55) (55) (55) (55)
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ON
0.0.0.0.
0.0.0.1.
0.0.0.2.
0.0.0.4.
0.0.0.8.
0.0.1.0.
0.0.2.0.
0.0.4.0.
0.0.8.0.
Notes: 1. “—” in the table means “OFF”.
2. Since the DO hardware is of open collector specification, the ON/OFF check must be performed in
meeting with the specification.
11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
■ PV calibration
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys to show (1.0.1.1.) on upper display, then press ENT
key.
■Gain No. select
Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (01-01). Connect calibration
device (See Section “11-3 Set Up”).
Input the gain number (See Table 11-9 and Table 11-10) by scrolling ↑, ↓, ←, or →
keys the upper display ( ENT key not required).
■PV zero, span
(1) PV zero adjustment
(a) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (01-02).
(b) Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 0% range value
(See Table 11-9), the signal need to be on the input for 10 to 15 seconds.
(c) Press ENT key after display stabilizes.
(2) PV span adjustment
(a) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (01-03).
(b) Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 100% range value
(See Table 11-9 and table 11-10).
(c) Press ENT key after display stabilizes.
Table 11-9.
Gain No. PV Input 0% PV Input 100% Connecting Position
0
1
–12.785mV
–8.565mV
–13.788mV
–12.000mV
–1.000mV
–0.100V
110.000mV Between 34(+) and 33(–)
58.303mV
40.481mV
23.300mV
11.000mV
1.100V
Between 34(+) and 33(–)
Between 34(+) and 33(–)
Between 34(+) and 33(–)
Between 34(+) and 33(–)
Between 34(+) and 33(–)
Between 34(+) and 33(–)
Between 34(+) and 33(–)
Between 34(+) and 33(–)
Between 34 and 33
2
3
4
5
6
–0.500V
5.500V
7
–1.000V
11.000V
8
0.000mA
10.000Ω
10.000Ω
0.000Ω
22.000mA
480.000Ω
178.000Ω
110.000Ω
45.000Ω
9
10
11
12
Between 34 and 33
Between 34 and 33
0.000Ω
Between 34 and 33
Table 11-10.
Gain No. PV Input 0% PV Input 100% Connecting Position
16
17
18
19
20
–8.000mV
–20.000mV
–1.000V
20.000mV
70.500mV
11.000V
Between 28(+) and 29(–)
Between 28(+) and 29(–)
Between 27(+) and 26(–)
Between 30 and 29
10.000Ω
0.000Ω
380.000Ω
110.000Ω
Between 30 and 29
11-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
Table 11-11.
Range Table of CH1 TC
Range Table of CH1 RTD
Type Code Range No. Gain No.
Range No.
Group
Type
K (CA)
Code
K09
K08
K04
K29
K44
K46
E08
J08
Gain No.
Group
0
1
2
3
1
3
3
0
1
3
3
3
3
2
2
4
0
1
1
2
0
4
F50
F46
F32
F36
F38
F33
F05
F03
F01
P50
P46
P32
P36
P38
P33
P05
P03
P01
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
9
9
1
K (CA)
2
K (CA)
9
3
K (CA)
9
JIS ’89 Pt100
(IEC Pt100Ω)
4
K (CA)
10
10
9
5
K (CA)
6
E (CRC)
J (IC)
7
9
RTD
8
T/C
T (CC)
T44
B18
R16
S16
W23
W14
D19
Z13
U13
Y13
Z08
Z07
Z06
10
9
9
B (PR30-6)
R (PR13)
S (PR10)
W (WRe5-26)
W (WRe5-26)
PR40-20
Ni-Ni⋅Mo
N
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
9
9
JIS ’89 JPt100
9
10
10
9
9
PL II
10
DIN U
Range Table of CH1 Linear
DIN L
Gain No.
Group
Type
Code
C01
C08
M01
L02
L01
L04
L08
V01
L05
L07
Range No.
Fe⋅Au-Cr
8
8
4
3
0
5
5
6
6
7
Linear mA
4 to 20mA
0 to 20mA
0 to 10mA
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
Range Table of CH2 T/C
Gain No.
Range No.
Group
Type
Code
K44
16
17
T/C
K (CA)
K (CA)
128
129
Linear mV –10 to +10mV
0 to +100mV
K29
0 to 1V
Range Table of CH2 RTD
Linear V
–1 to 1V
1 to 5V
0 to 5V
0 to 10V
Gain No.
Range No.
Group
RTD
Type
Code
F36
19
19
19
19
160
161
176
177
JIS ’89 Pt100
(IEC Pt100Ω)
F01
P36
P01
JIS ’89 JPt100
Range Table of CH2 Linear
Gain No.
Group
Type
Code
L07
Range No.
192
0 to 10V
0 to 5V
18
18
Linear V
V01
193
11-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
■ Cold junction sensor calibration
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys to show (2.0.2.2.) on upper display, then press ENT
key.
■The cold junction input 0%
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-01).
(2) Press ENT key after display stabilizes, AD count is shown on lower display.
■The cold junction AD count data
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-02).
(2) Press ENT key after display stabilizes, AD count is shown on lower display.
■The cold junction temperature data
(1) Press SETUP key until the PROG/SEG display shows (02-03).
(2) Connect the thermometer (55).
(3) Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys to set above temperature value(°C).
(4) Press ENT key.
■ Current output calibration
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys to show (4.0.4.4.) on the upper display, then press ENT
key.
Connect the digital ammeter across terminals (See Figure 11-9).
■OUT CH1 output calibration
(1) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (04-01).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys until meter indicates 4.00mA, then press ENT key.
(2) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (04-02).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys until meter indicates 20.00mA, then press ENT key.
■OUT CH2 output calibration
(1) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-03).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys until meter indicates 4.00mA, then press ENT key.
(2) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (06-04).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys until meter indicates 20.00mA, then press ENT key.
■OUT CH1 output calibration
(1) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (04-05).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys until meter indicates 4.00mA, then press ENT key.
(2) Press PARA key until the PROG/SEG display shows (04-06).
Scroll ↑, ↓, ←, or → keys until meter indicates 20.00mA, then press ENT key.
11-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
11-3 Set Up
PV
CH1
PV
CH2
PV
CH1
PV
CH2
34 33
28 29
34 33 32
30 29 28
Copper
leads
Copper
leads
+
−
+
−
Millivolt sources
Millivolt sources
Decade resistance box Decade resistance box
Gain No. 0 to 7
Gain No. 16 to 17
Gain No. 9 to 10
Gain No. 19
PV
CH1
PV
CH2
PV
CH1
PV
CH2
34 33 32
30 29 28
34 33 32
30 29 28
Copper
leads
Copper
leads
Decade resistance box Decade resistance box
Decade resistance box Decade resistance box
Gain No. 11 to 12(0%)
Gain No. 20(0%)
Gain No. 11 to 12(100%)
Gain No. 20(100%)
PV
CH1
PV
CH2
33 31
26 27
Copper
leads
Copper
leads
−
+
-
+
Signal generators 4–20mA
Millivolt sources
Gain No. 8
Gain No. 18
11-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11. CALIBRATION
OUT
CH1
OUT
CH2
OUT
CH3
11 12 14 15 17 18
Copper
leads
+
−
+
−
+
−
Digital ammeter
Figure 11-11. Current Outputs
11-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EN2I-6026
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
To reduce risk of electric shock which could cause personal injury, all safety notices in
this documentation.
This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where hazardous live voltages
may be accessible.
・ If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection
provided by the equipment must be impaired.
・ Do not replace any component (or part) not explicity specified as replaceable by your
supplier.
・ All wiring must be in accordance with local norms and carried out by authorized experienced
personnel.
・ The ground terminal must be connected before any other wiring (and disconnected last).
・ A switch in the main supply is required near the equipment.
・ Mains power supply wiring requires a (T) 1.0A, 250V fuse(s).(IEC127)
EQUIPMENT RATINGS
Supply voltages
Frequency
100 to 240Vac (operation power voltages 90 to 264Vac)
50/60Hz
Power or current ratings
30VA maximum
EQUIPMENT CONDITIONS
Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors. Operation of any
electrical instrument in such an environment constitutes a safety hazard.
Temperature
Humidity
Vibration
0 to 50℃
10 to 90%RH
Frequency 10 to 60Hz
Acceleration 1.96m/s maximum
2
Installation category
Pollution degree
Category II (IEC664-1, EN61010-1)
2
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
The controller must be mounted into a panel to limit operator access to the rear terminal.
Specification of common mode voltage; The common mode voltages of all I/O except for main
supply and relay outputs are less than 30Vrms, 42.4V peak and 60Vdc.
APPLICABLE STANDARDS
EN61010-1, EN50081-2, EN50082-2, EN61326
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batterries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
2 degrees of freedom PID selection•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-12
7-15
7-15
7-15
7-15
4-18
4-17
Position-proportional output (2G)
Relay output (0D)
3-position control deviation lower limit
3-position control deviation upper limit
Voltage output (6D)
3-position control lower limit hysteresis
3-position control upper limit hysteresis
Control/output state LED
Controller function
Controller status events
CPL communications•
CPL communications port selection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2, 2-3
5-16
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-wire system RS-485 mutual connection
5-wire system RS-485 mutual connection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-5
1-4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-39
-A-
CR filter
Crimped terminal
Cycle
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-4
4-4
Accessories•
Add-on terminal base•
Add-on terminal layout
ADV (advance)
Alarm code
AUTO (automatic)
Auto-tuning (AT)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
10-7
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-1
4-7
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-9, 8-11
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-14
9-2
5-12, 5-14
-D-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Data structure
Data types
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-3
5-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6-11
7-33
7-33
7-33
7-33
4-11
DC current input
DC voltage input•
Displays
Dust-proof covers
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-9, 4-8
2-9, 4-8
Auxiliary output 1 lower limit•
Auxiliary output 1 upper limit•
Auxiliary output 2 lower limit•
Auxiliary output 2 upper limit•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2
3-4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-E-
Auxiliary outputs (outputs 2, 3)
END
Event 1 ON delay time
Event 1 standby
Event 2 ON delay time
Event 2 stand by
Event 3 ON delay time
Event 3 standby
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-12
7-22
7-22
7-22
7-22
7-22
7-22
7-18
-B-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Basic display state•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2
6-2
1-2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Basic display selection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Basic function block diagram
Basic indicator LED lamps
BAT (Low voltage battery LED)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2, 2-3
2-2, 2-3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Battery Life
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
9-13
9-10
Event configuration data settings
Event LEDs
Event output (relay output) connection
Events 1 to 3
External dimensions
External switch inputs connection
External switch operation
Battery replacing
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2, 2-3
4-12
5-3, 8-6
3-1, 10-8
4-15
6-8
Body
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-C-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cable•
Case
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-3
2-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cold junction compensation
Communications connection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-34
4-16
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-F-
Console
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-1, 2-2, 2-4
5-11, 5-13
7-42
6-5, 6-6
4-9
FAST (fast forward)
Feedback resistor•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-12, 5-14
Constant-value operation•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-9
2-7
Constant-value operation data setting
Constant-value operation display•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Functions using two or more keys
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-G-
Control outputs (outputs 1, 2) connection
Current output (5G)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
G.Soak (guarantee soak)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-8, 8-10
G.Soak time-out
General reset
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8-10
8-15
Heat/cool output (3D)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Heat/cool output (5K)
Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ground
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-6
-O-
ON-OFF control differential
Optional parts
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-13
10-7
5-18
-H-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hard dust-proof cover set
Heat/cool control dead zone
HOLD
How to use PARA key
•
•
3-1, 10-7, 10-9
7-13
5-12, 5-14
Output processing functions
Auxiliary output
Control output
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-4
SP output
-I-
-P-
Input 1 connection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-8
Panel cutout dimensions
Parameters set up
Pattern link
Patterns
PID operation initial MV
PID operation initialization
PID set automatic switching
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-2
7-1
Input 1 square root extraction dropout
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-33
7-38
5-17
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Input 1 Zener barrier adjustment
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-10, 8-12
5-2, 8-5
Input processing functions
Input Type and Range No.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-11
7-11
Inputs and outputs isolation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-19
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-8
8-9
5-8
-K-
PID set No.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Key cover
Key lock
Keys
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-1
7-10
2-4
PID set selection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Position-proportional control dead zone
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-13
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power ON operation•
Power supply connection
Profile display
Program end
Program No. display•
Program operation
Program operation display
Program patterns•
Program patterns selection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6-1
4-6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-L-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2, 2-3
5-14
2-2
5-11, 5-13
6-3, 6-4, 6-5
1-3, 5-2
6-7
Loader jack•
Lock screw
Lower display
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-4, 2-7
2-1
2-2, 2-3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-M-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MANUAL
MANUAL operation
Mode indicator LED lamps
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-12, 5-14
6-11
2-2, 2-3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Program protect•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-10
5-16
8-14
8-12
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Programmer function
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Mode transition
Mode types
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-13
5-11
Program copy•
Program deletion•
Program set up
PV display
PV start
PV type events
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Model selection guide
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-5
9-8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8-1
7-34
5-9, 8-11
Motor adjustment is impossible
Motor control method selection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-16
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Motor valve opening adjustment fully
open/close time
Motor valve opening automatic adjustment
Mounting bracket
Mounting locations
Mounting method
MV change limit
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-17
7-17
-R-
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-1, 3-5, 10-7
Range No.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-3
3-5
READY
RESET
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-11
5-14
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-11
Resistance temperature detector (RTD)
RS-485 connection
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-8, 4-7
4-16
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-N-
Noise•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-4
Index-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-S-
Segment No. display
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2
Segment deletion
Segment insertion
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8-13
8-13
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Self-diagnostics
Setup data setting
Smart-tuning method selection
Soft dust-proof cover set
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
9-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-27
7-12
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-1, 10-7, 10-9
SP1 lower limit
SP1 upper limit
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-33
7-33
7-37
10-1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Special functions•
Specifications•
•
•
•
Standard terminal base
Standard terminal layout
System configuration
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-1
4-7
1-4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-T-
Table data settings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-40
3-1, 10-7, 10-9
4-4
2-8, 4-8
6-4, 7-34
Time event output (open-collector) connection 4-13
Terminal cover set
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Terminals connection•
Thermocouple inputs
Time display
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Time event outputs
Time events 1 to 5 selection•
Time events
Trouble during key entry
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1-2
5-6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5-5, 5-6
9-3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-U-
Upper display
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-2, 2-3
-V-
Variable parameter settings
Varister
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-7
3-4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Voltage output 1 adjustment
Voltage output 2 adjustment
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7-35
7-35
7-34
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Voltage time-proportional output system•
-W-
Wiring
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4-1
9-8
Wiring for reverse motor rotation•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Index-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
Printed Manual Number
Date
Edition
Revised pages
Description
99-04 EN1I-6197
00-06
1st Edition
2nd Edition iv
Instruction Manual.was changed to User's Manual
SERVICE CENTERS Address of JAPAN was changed
00-08
3rd Edition 7-32
No. 84 and No. 85 Items was changed
PV Input 100% of Gain No. 1 and Gain No. 8 was
changed
11-10
01-06
03-06
4th Edition 7-32
No. 94
Unused
PID type changed
5th Edition 8-4
G.Soak time-out added
ꢀ Setting up G.Soak time-out items added
Applicable standards added, EN61326
8-10
10-6, SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS
Programming
G.Soak time-out added
Map Draft Form
03-08
04-02
6th Edition 4-3
Fujikura Cable Co. → Fujikura Ltd.
Handling Precautions added, to connect SG
terminals each others.
Setting range: 0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s) added.
ON time setting + 0.1 to 599.9 (0.1s) added.
Setting range changed “0 to 1000U” to “0.00 to
99.59 (h:min/min:s) or 0.0 to 599.9 (0.1s)” in
G. Soak time-out items.
4-17, 4-18
8-5, 8-7, 8-8
8-7, 8-8
8-10
Index-1 to 3
Allover revised.
7th Edition 4-2
The 8th item of Handling Precautions added.
Item of Altitude added.
10-6
10-6, 1 to 11
Description change based on the European
standards revision.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HONEYWELL SERVICE CENTERS
NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
HONEYWELL BV
HONEYWELL A/S
Askerveien 61
PO Box 263
Laaderhoogtweg 18
NL-1101 EA AMSTERDAM ZO
THE NETHERLANDS
Tel.:31 20 56 56 911
N-1371 ASKER
NORWAY
Tel.:47 66 90 20 30
POLAND
HONEYWELL Ltd
UI Augustowka 3
PL-02981 WARSAW
POLAND
PORTUGAL
HONEYWELL PORTUGAL LDA
Edificio Suecia II
Av.do Forte nr 3-Piso 3
CARNAXIDE
Tel.:48 2 642 25 70
2795 LINDA A VELHA
PORTUGAL
Tel.:351 4172 602
REPUBLIC OF IRELAND
HONEYWELL
Unit 5
Long Mile Road
DUBLIN 12
Republic of Ireland
Tel.:353 1 565944
REP.OF SINGAPORE
HONEYWELL PTE LTD.
BLOCK 750E CHAI CHEE ROAD
06-01 CHAI CHEE IND.PARK
1646 SINGAPORE
RUSSIA
REP OF SINGAPORE
Tel.:65 449 7609
HONEYWELL INC
Tryokhprundny Pereulok 11.13
SU 10 3001 MOSCOW
Tel.:7095 29 92 531
SLOVAK REPUBLIC
HONEYWELL
Trnavska 3
SOUTH AFRICA
HONEYWELL LTD
34 Harry Street
831 04 BRATISLAVA
SLOVAKIA
Tel.:42 7 601 23
Robertsham
JOHANNESBURG 2001
REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA
Tel.:27 11 680 3440
SPAIN
HONEYWELL
Josefa Valcarcel, 24
PO Box 29106
28080 MADRID
SPAIN
SWEDEN
HONEYWELL A.B.
Storsatragrand 5
S-127 86 STOCKHOLM
SWEDEN
Tel.:34 1 32 02 112
SWITZERLAND
HONEYWELL A.G.
Hertistrasse 2
Tel.:46 8 775 55 00
UNITED KINGDOM
HONEYWELL HOUSE
Charles Square
8304 WALLISELLEN
SWITZERLAND
Tel.:41 1 839 2525
BRACKNELL, BERKS. RG12 1EB
UNITED KINGDOM
Tel.:44 344 424 555
U.S.A
HONEYWELL INC
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLS DIV.
1100 VIRGINIA DRIVE
PA 19034-3260 FT.WASHINGTON
U.S.A
VENEZUELA
HONEYWELL CA
APARTADO 61314
1060 CARACAS
VENEZUELA
Tel.:215 641 3000
Tel.:58 2 239 7533
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HONEYWELL SERVICE CENTERS
ASIA PACIFIC
HONEYWELL ASIA PACIFIC Inc.
Room 3213-3225
ARGENTINA
HONEYWELL S.A.I.C.
BELGRANO 1156
BUENOS AIRES
ARGENTINA
Sun Kung Kai Centre
No 30 Harbour Road
WANCHAI
Tel.:54 1 383 9290
HONG KONG
Tel.:852 829 82 98
AUSTRALIA
HONEYWELL LIMITED
5 Thomas Holt Drive
North Ryde Sydney
NSW AUSTRALIA 2113
Tel.:61 2 353 7000
AUSTRIA
HONEYWELL AUSTRIA G.m.b.H.
Handelskai 388
A1020 VIENNA
AUSTRIA
Tel.:43 1 213 300
BELGIUM
HONEYWELL S.A.
Avenue de Schipol, 3
1140 BRUSSELS
BELGIUM
BRAZIL
HONEYWELL DO BRAZIL AND CIA
Rua Jose Alves Da Chunha
Lima 172
Tel.:32 2 728 27 11
BUTANTA
05360 SAO PAULO SP
BRAZIL
Tel.:55 11 819 3755
CANADA
HONEYWELL LIMITED
THE HONEYWEEL CENTRE
155 GORDON BAKER RD
M2H 3N7 NORTH YORK, ONTARIO
CANADA
CZECHIA
HONEYWELL PRAGUE
Krocinovska 3
Tel.:416 499 6111
CS16000 PRAGUE 6
CZECHIA
Tel.:422 243 10 754
DENMARK
HONEYWELL A/S
Lyngby Hovedgade 98
2800 LYNGBY
FINLAND
HONEYWELL OY
Ruukintie 8
DENMARK
Tel.:45 45 93 56 56
SF-02320 ESPOO
FINLAND
Tel.:358 0 80101
FRANCE
HONEYWELL S.A.
4, Avenue Ampere
GERMANY
MONTIGNY LE BRETONNEUX
F-78886 ST QUENTIN EN YVELINES
FRANCE
HONEYWELL AG
Kaiserleistrasse 39
Postfach 10 08 65
D-63067 OFFENBACH/MAIN
GERMANY
Tel.:(1) 30 58 80 00
HUNGARY
Tel.:49 69 80 640
HONEYWELL Kft
Volgy U 30
ITALY
H-1026 BUDAPEST
HUNGARY
Tel.:36 1 116 76 59
HONEYWELL S.p.A.
Via Vittor Pisani, 13
20124 MILANO
ITALY
JAPAN
Tel.:39 2 67 731
HONEYWELL KK
14-6, Shibaura 1-chome,
Minato-ku, Tokyo 150-0023
Japan
MEXICO
HONEYWELL S.A.DE CV
AV. CONSTITUYENTES 900
COL. LOMAS ALTAS
11950 MEXICO CITY
MEXICO
Tel.:81-3-5440-1395
Tel.:52 5 259 1966
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No. CP-UM-5093E
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Sharp Stereo System CD DH950P User Manual
Shure Range 98H C User Manual
Shure Recording Equipment A15TG User Manual
Sony Computer Drive 1GN User Manual
Sony Home Theater System CMT SX2D User Manual
Star Manufacturing Oven HSCO14 User Manual
State Industries Electric Heater GPG85 540 NEA User Manual
Sterling Plumbing Outdoor Shower 72210106 User Manual
Sub Zero Ventilation Hood I663418R User Manual
Symphonic DVD VCR Combo CWF803 User Manual